JP2019069306A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of inhibiting such a trouble that a player has a feeling of strangeness, when executing a game.SOLUTION: When power is shutdown, storage control means executes control to store power-shutdown-time information according to clocking information stored in second storage means, in a bit in which at least clocking information of a first storage area is not stored. When condition determination means determines that a prescribed condition is established, the storage control means executes control to store the clocking information based on the power shutdown information stored in first storage means, in the second storage means. Accordingly, when the game machine is powered on again with the prescribed condition established, the clocking information based on the power-shutdown-time information held even during the power shutdown state can be stored in the second storage means so as to prevent such a trouble that switching timing to a specific performance mode is deviated due to power shutdown state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with clock means such as an RTC, and effects are made different based on time information acquired from the clock means, thereby realizing different game characteristics depending on the time slot for playing a game, There are some that are trying to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-19803

  However, in such a gaming machine, for example, power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines, and clocking information is acquired from clocking means and stored based on the timing of the powering-on. By configuring to execute a specific effect based on the fact that a predetermined time has elapsed from the time information, it is possible to execute an effect with a plurality of gaming machines synchronized in timing.

  Here, if such a configuration is adopted, stored clocking information is erased and the like is erased if a situation occurs in which only the power of some gaming machines is turned off during business. Even when the power is turned on again, the time information stored in the other gaming machines is shifted. Therefore, there is a problem that the player may be confused because the timing at which a specific effect is performed is also shifted.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player feels a sense of discomfort when playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises display means capable of displaying the effect mode, and display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode. Clocking means capable of clocking even in a power-off state in which the power supply has been interrupted, and each time the clocking means updates clocking information, part of a first storage area constituted by a plurality of bits in a predetermined storage area A first storage unit capable of storing clock information updated by a bit and capable of storing the stored information even in the power-off state; and a second storage unit capable of storing the information stored in the first storage unit; Storage control means for controlling to obtain and store timekeeping information stored in the first storage area based on power-on in the second storage means, and the storage control means stores the information in the second storage means After power on based on the timing information Whether to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on the elapsed time determination means for determining the elapsed time elapsed and the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determination means The apparatus further comprises: an effect switching determining unit to determine, and a condition determining unit capable of determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on power on, and the storage control unit is configured to be in the power-off state. (2) Control is made to store the power interruption time information according to the timekeeping information stored in the storage means at least in the bit in the first storage area where the timekeeping information is not stored, and the condition judging means satisfies the predetermined condition If it is determined that the time information is determined, control is performed to store, in the second storage means, timing information based on the power interruption information stored in the first storage means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first storage means is composed of a plurality of bits, and a power-off time information storage area capable of storing the power-off time information in all the bits. And the storage control means, when in the power-off state, includes the power-off time information according to the timing information stored in the second storage means, the power-off time information storage area, and the first storage. It is controlled to store the time information of the area into the unstored bits.

  A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising storage judgment means capable of judging whether the power-off time information is stored in the first storage means, When the storage control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, and the storage determination means determines that the power-off time information is stored in the first storage means, Control is performed to store, in the second storage unit, timing information based on the power-off time information stored in the first storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, every time the clocking means capable of clocking even in the power-off state updates the clocking information, a bit of a part of the first memory area constituted by a plurality of bits in the predetermined memory area The time information updated at step S. is stored by the first storage means. The information stored in the first storage means is held even in the power-off state. Then, the information stored in the first storage means is stored in the second storage means, and the second memory means acquires and stores the timekeeping information stored in the first storage area based on the power on. It is controlled by the storage control means. Further, based on the clocking information stored in the second storage unit by the storage control unit, it is determined by the presentation switching determination unit whether or not to switch the presentation mode displayed by the display control unit to a specific presentation mode. Based on the input, it is judged by the condition judging means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when the power is cut off, the storage control unit is configured to store the power-off time information according to the clocking information stored in the second storage unit in at least the bit in which the clocking information of the first storage area is not stored. Control is performed by the condition determination unit so that the time measurement information based on the interruption information stored in the first storage unit is stored in the second storage unit when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination unit. It is controlled by the storage control means. As a result, if power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines without establishing a predetermined condition, even if one gaming machine is switched off, it will be switched off. In the first storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power-off state, the power-off time information is stored, and the power-off time information is held even in the power-off state. Therefore, if the power is turned on again while the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store, in the second storage unit, the clocking information based on the power-off time information held even during the power-off state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the timing at which the effect mode is switched to the effect mode is shifted by being switched off. In addition, when the power interruption information is stored in the first storage unit, the first storage unit can be stored not only in the storage area where no information is stored but also in a part of the first storage area. Can be used efficiently, and information can be stored accurately even if the size of the information at the time of power interruption increases. Therefore, more detailed power-off time information can be stored in the first storage unit, so that the error in the timing of switching to the specific rendering mode can be reduced. As described above, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, in the first storage means, the power failure information is made up of a plurality of bits, and is stored in the power failure information storage area in which the power failure information can be stored in all the bits. Then, when it is in the power-off state, the power-off time information according to the clocking information stored in the second storage means is stored in the power-off time information storage area and the bit in which the clocking information of the first storage area is not stored. It is controlled by the storage control means to be stored. Thus, since the power-off information can be stored in the power-off information storage area and the bits not used for counting the first storage area, the first storage is compared to the case where the power-off information is stored in only one of them. The means can be used efficiently. Therefore, the data amount of the power interruption information which can be stored in the first storage means can be increased, so that the information can be accurately stored even if the size of the power interruption information becomes large, Detailed power-off time information can be stored in the first storage means. Therefore, the error of the timing of switching to the specific effect mode can be made smaller, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, the following effect is exerted. That is, it is judged by the memory judgment means whether or not the power failure information is stored in the first memory means. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, and when it is determined that the power-off time information is stored in the first storage means by the storage determination means, the first storage means is stored It is controlled by the storage control means so that the timekeeping information based on the power interruption information is stored in the second storage means. Thereby, the second storage is performed based on the inappropriate information when the power is turned on in the state where the predetermined condition is satisfied although the power-off time information is not stored in the first storage means. Since it can be suppressed that timekeeping information is stored in the means, improper timekeeping information is stored in the timekeeping information storage means, and it is determined whether to switch to a specific mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. It can suppress being judged by the means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted, so that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ROM, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed the production | presentation switching table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a time-measurement apparatus. It is the model which showed the register table of the time-measurement apparatus typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the time acquisition process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selective processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control procedure. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is error command processing executed by the MPU of the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the demonstration display processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the time-measurement apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the register table of the time-measurement apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time counter initialization process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the time-measurement apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the register table of the time-measurement apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the counter initial value setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the counter update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the period information table of ROM in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the time-measurement apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the table acquisition process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time confirmation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first) when the ball passes the second entrance 67. 2) The lottery will be held. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit of the special symbol is performed, and when it is determined that the big symbol is a special symbol, the big hit type The determination of is also made. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) The opening is repeated five times (five rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As a jackpot type of special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the end of the special game state as a added value after the jackpot end, on the game according to these jackpot types The player's value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player strikes a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a, so many balls enter the first ball entrance 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second ball entrance 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It will be in the state. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 , And is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, there are provided two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

  The "big hit A" is the probability variation jackpot that the maximum round number shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the 15 round big hit, and the "big hit B" is the maximum round number after the 15 round jackpot. The special symbol low probability state and the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) is the time-speaking jackpot that becomes the time-shortened state of the normal symbol.

  Here, "high probability state of special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol thereafter is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, while the probability fluctuation of the so-called special symbol (during the variation of the special symbol) In other words, it is the state of the game which is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, "low probability state of special symbol" refers to the time when the probability change is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change. Also, among the "special symbol low probability state" and the time saving state (time and day middle) of the normal symbol, while the jackpot probability is a normal state, only the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is up with the jackpot probability unchanged It refers to a gaming state in which a ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64. In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time when the electric character (not shown) attached to the first ball entry port 64 opens, or a single hit The number of times the motorized role opens may be changed.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) The special symbol (the first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. In the case of "big hit A" to shift to a high probability state (probability state) of the special symbol after the big hit end, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to "high probability pattern") with odd numbers are aligned In the case of "big hit B" to shift to a low probability state of special symbols after the end, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to "low probability symbols") to which even numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out and the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed as the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67 is being executed by a lighting state, or As a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, the normal symbol (the second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. FIG. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, as in the first ball entrance 64, and is three times or less, or five times or more (For example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (5 round jackpot) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided. Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  FIG. 7A is a view schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, as a part of the fixed value data described above, the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the second random number table 202c. , Fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the random number counter C1 (not shown) is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 7B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 7 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern is set for each display pattern. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 24) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first ball entrance The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 7A) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1 If the value matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first per random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol and high probability when special symbol is more likely to be a big hit than low probability (special symbol special It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbol and the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. Here, whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 is a random number for which the special symbol is a big hit is defined by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A). The first random number table 202a includes a first random number table 202a (not shown) for low probability of a special symbol and a first random number table 202a (not shown) for a high probability of special symbol. And the first random number table 202a is used depending on whether the special symbol has a low probability or a special symbol having a high probability.

  In the first random number table 202a for low probability time of the special symbol, “7, 307, 582” is stored as three random number values that become the jackpots of the special symbol. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 900, and the total number of jackpots is 3, so the probability of being a special symbol is "1/300".

  On the other hand, in the first random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols, as the 30 random number values that become the big wins of the special symbols, “28, 58, 85, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 900, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/30".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability time, and the random noise for the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values with numerical values, random numbers that will be the jackpots of each are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, the jackpot type is defined for each value of the first collision type counter C2 by the first collision type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Specifically, in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is "0 to 49" is "jackpot A". In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “back and forth reach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 24) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is done.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202 d includes, for example, “disengagement (for a long time)”, “disengagement (for a short time)”, “disappearance normal reach”, “disappearance super reach”, “disappearance” as a distraction fluctuation pattern. A variety of special reach is defined, and a variation pattern of jackpot A and jackpot B common, a variety of "shared normal reach", a variety of "shared super reach", and a variety of "shared special reach", is defined as the variation pattern for jackpot A. “Special reach” types are defined, and “common normal reach” types, “shared super reach types”, and “shared special reach types” are defined as the variation patterns for hit and off. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 7 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the second hit random number counter C4 If the value matches the value of the random number which is the second set by the random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table 202c is a second per random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 7 (c)) for low probability of a normal symbol (during normal condition of a normal symbol) and its low probability It is divided into two types with the second per random number table 202c (refer to Fig. 7 (c)) for high probability when it is likely to hit the normal symbol (period in which the symbol is in the short time state), The number of winning random numbers is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the second random number table 202c for low probability of the normal symbol stores 24 random values corresponding to the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28 It is ". As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be hit is 24, so the probability that the symbol is normally hit is “1/10”.

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 obtains a normal symbol. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, in the second random number table 202c for the high probability of the normal symbol, 200 random number values corresponding to the normal symbol are stored, and the range is “5 to 204”. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 selects the normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64. It should be noted that a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit, but it is open. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 6, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 24), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 is a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a middle time It has a counter 203e and a probability change flag 203f.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The respective values of the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as the drawing of the special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big hit lottery of the original special symbol In addition to the above, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3. Thus, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning combination From now on, it is described that the prediction is made by prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information to save the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. From this, various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  Then, various information predicted is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the prize information command, and the voice lamp control device 113 wins the prize information using various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command. It stores in the information storage area 223a.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance port 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, if you shift data from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area will be empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserved areas will be the same as in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Are added (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 18).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 18 and S405 in FIG. 20). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry hole 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

  When the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not (S703 in FIG. 21: No).

  The time saving counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol if the value of the time counter 203 e is zero. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203e is set to zero, and the main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and the counter 203e is set to 100 each time it is determined that "big hit B". Ru. That is, when the "big hit B" is reached, 100 is newly set in the time saving medium counter 203e regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203e.

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time-sinking counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for a normal symbol based on a random symbol table for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol per symbol table for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 20).

  The probability change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203f is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state, and if the probability variation flag 203f is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The certain variation flag 203f is turned on when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for special symbols and is determined to be "big hit A", and is turned off when determined to be "big hit B" (S213 in FIG. 17). , S214).

  When a big hit lottery of special symbols is performed, it is referred to whether or not the probability change flag 203f is on, and if it is on, the big hit lottery of special symbols based on the first hit type selection table 202b for high probability time If the probability change flag 203f is off, a jackpot lottery of special symbols is performed based on the first hit type selection table 202b for low probability.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208 Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) Control of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, a frame button 22, a clocking unit 262, etc. are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a (not shown) and an effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 8).

  The variation pattern table 222a is a table used to determine the aspect of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, according to the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the rough fluctuation patterns such as "outside normal reach", "shared normal reach", and "shared special reach". The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used to determine the detailed aspect of the fluctuation pattern based on the aspect of the rough fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command, and the rough of the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command For each aspect, an aspect of a plurality of detailed variation patterns that can be selected is defined.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time is measured (measured) by the clocking device 262. Then, based on the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262, the mode of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the rendering mode such as the background image is changed to a special rendering mode at predetermined time intervals. Control is to be done. For this reason, the fluctuation pattern table 222a defines a fluctuation pattern of a special effect mode and a fluctuation pattern of a normal effect mode. Then, when it is determined that the effect is executed in the special effect mode based on the time information (time information) of the time counting device 262, one of the fluctuation patterns of the special effect mode in the fluctuation pattern table 222a. The variation pattern aspect of is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rendering is not performed in a special rendering mode (that is, the rendering is performed in a normal rendering mode) based on time information (clocking information) of the time counting device 262, the fluctuation pattern table One variation pattern aspect is selected from the variation patterns of the normal presentation aspect 222a.

  That is, in the fluctuation pattern table 222a, a plurality of detailed aspects are defined for each of the rough aspects of the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, and in the plurality of detailed aspects An aspect of the variation pattern of the normal presentation aspect and an aspect of the variation pattern of the special presentation aspect are defined.

  Next, the effect switching table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether the rendering mode is the normal rendering mode or the special rendering mode, based on the time information (clocking information) of the timing device 262. Then, the effect switching table 222b determines whether the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in the normal effect mode or in the special effect mode. Used for

  The determination of the effect mode is performed in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 of FIG. 28) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the determination value of the effect switching table 222b shown in FIG. The effect mode is specified according to the elapsed time T (see S1602 in FIG. 29) determined based on the time information (clock information) of the time counting device 262 (see S1603 in FIG. 29).

  FIG. 8 is a view schematically showing an example of the effect switching table 222b stored in the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, in the effect switching table 222b, the type of the effect period is defined in association with the value of the elapsed time T after power on to the gaming machine. If the value of the elapsed time T indicates a normal effect period, a special effect flag 223 e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later and a work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are provided. The display special effect flag 233k is turned off. Then, based on these flags, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in the normal effect mode. On the other hand, when the value of the elapsed time T indicates the special effect period, the special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are provided. The display special effect flag 233k is turned on. Then, based on these flags, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in a special effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, in the case of 60 minutes or less after power on, it is a normal effect period, and 10 minutes after the elapse of 60 minutes is a special effect period. Then, after 10 minutes which is considered as the special effect period has passed, it is considered as the normal effect period again, and the normal effect period continues for 50 minutes. After that, a special rendering period of 10 minutes and a regular rendering period of 50 minutes are alternately repeated.

  As described above, except for 60 minutes immediately after the power is turned on, switching to a different presentation period is required if one hour of game is played, so that it is possible to make the player feel new by switching the presentation period. Therefore, even if the player is playing the game for a long time, only the same effect occurs, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game. In addition, since the special rendering period of 10 minutes and the regular rendering period of 50 minutes are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone of the special rendering period and the time zone of the normal rendering period. . Therefore, it is possible to start the game aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect aspect suited to the player's taste is performed for each player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, although the correspondence of the elapsed time T in the elapsed time T after 180 minutes and a presentation period is abbreviate | omitted and described in FIG. 8, the special presentation period of 10 minutes and 50 minutes are also actually 180 minutes or later. It is set so that the normal rendering period of and are alternately repeated. The range of the elapsed time T in the effect switching table 222b may be set to at least the opening hours of the hall at a minimum. For example, the elapsed time T is less than 1440 minutes (24 hours). The correspondence with the period may be set, or the correspondence for several days may be set. Further, the type of effect period is not necessarily limited to two types of the normal effect period and the special effect period, and three or more effect periods having different modes of effect to be performed may be provided.

  Furthermore, although a table in which the type of effect period is defined for each value of elapsed time T is defined in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a table corresponding to all the values of T. For example, one kind of range of the value of the elapsed time T, which is a normal effect period, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T, which is a special effect period, are defined one by one. When out of the range, a predetermined value may be added to the specified range of the elapsed time T. As a specific example, for example, the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is a normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the values of the elapsed time T which is a special effect period is 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes When the value of the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, it is defined as 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the normal rendering period and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the special rendering period It is also possible to add 60 minutes 00 seconds to each and control to reset the type of effect period in the range of the value of the elapsed time T from 60 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds.

  More specifically, in the effect switching table 222b, the range of the value of the elapsed time T in the normal effect period is 0:00 to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T in the special effect period is Only the information of 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes 00 seconds is defined. Then, based on power on, the information defined in the effect switching table 222b is copied to a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the copied information. Then, if the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, which is the maximum value of the value of the elapsed time T defined in the copied information, 60 minutes 00 seconds are added to the copied information to make a new one. Update to information. That is, the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is a normal effect period is 60 minutes 00 seconds to 110 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is a special effect period is 110 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds It is updated to the information that there is. Thereafter, every 60 minutes and 00 seconds, 60 minutes 00 seconds are added to the copied information to control to update to new information, and based on the updated information and the elapsed time T, the rendering period Determine the type of

  In this case, the amount of data in the effect switching table 222b is reduced, so the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Therefore, the price of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a special effect flag 223e, and a time information storage area 223f And at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1407 in FIG. 31). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the number-of-held-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2701 in FIG. 32), and is turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 30). The fluctuation start flag 223c is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1707 in FIG. 30). The stop type selection flag 223 d is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The special effect flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the current effect period is a special effect period. This special effect flag 223e is a part of the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the effect switching table 222b in the elapsed time check process (see S1311 of FIG. 28) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 It is turned on when it is determined to switch to (see S1610 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, it is turned off when it is determined that the special effect period is switched to the normal effect period based on the effect switching table 222b (see S1606 in FIG. 29). The special effect flag 223e is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the special effect flag 223e is turned on, a special effect command is output (see S1611 in FIG. 29). Therefore, based on receiving the special effect command, the display control device 114 or the like performs round effect or demonstration effect. Etc. are executed in a special presentation mode. Then, the special effect mode continues until the display control device 114 or the like receives a normal effect command (see S1607 in FIG. 29) output based on the turning off of the special effect flag 223e.

  Depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, it is indicated whether it is a special effect period or a normal effect period, so the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). In the reference), when selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, check the clocking information (time information) of the clocking device 262 and determine whether it is a special effect period It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is ON or not. Therefore, the process for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the hall, if a plurality of pachinko machines 10 according to the present embodiment are arranged side by side (the islands are configured) and installed, the effect mode of the effects performed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 forming the island can be Accordingly, it is possible to simultaneously switch to different presentation modes (is linked to the island). By interlocking with the island, depending on the timing of playing a game, the display effects (the display mode of the background, the third symbol, the character giving a notice, etc.), the sound effects (sound effects, back music, etc.) etc. Since it is executed, each player can start playing the game at the timing when the effect of the effect mode matching the user's preference is performed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of effect period is switched according to the elapsed time, but island interlocking may be performed according to the day of the week, the date, the season, or the like.

  The time information storage area 223 f is an area in which time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 is stored when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In the time acquisition process (see S1211 of FIG. 26) of the start-up process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221, current time information (clocking information) acquired by the time counting device 262 is stored. The stored time information is used to calculate the elapsed time T from the power on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 28) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, and in the normal effect period. It is used to determine whether it is a special effect period or a special effect period (see S1604 in FIG. 29). Since the content stored in the RAM 223 is not backed up, when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the clock information stored in the time information storage area 223f is cleared.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of effect period is determined based on the time information acquired from the clocking device 262 and stored in the time information storage area 223f during the start-up process. In the machine 10, if the timing at which the start-up process is performed is matched, the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f of each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f is matched, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the elapsed time The timing to switch from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on T and the timing to switch from the special effect period to the normal effect period can be matched based on the elapsed time T. Thereby, the person concerned of a hole can unify the presentation period of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 simultaneously. Therefore, with some pachinko machines 10 being in a normal rendering period and the other pachinko machines 10 being in a special rendering period, the player who is playing the game is executed in a rendering mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity with In addition, as a method of turning on power simultaneously to a plurality of pachinko machines 10, for example, an island constituted by a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is provided, and an external power supply which can turn on power in island units is used. It should be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the time counting device 262, and the time information acquired during the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process (rather than switching the type of presentation period according to the time zone) The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in S1311), and the type of presentation period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the clock devices 262 of the pachinko machines 10 deviate from each other due to aged deterioration or the like, the mutually deviated time information is not directly used for determining the type of presentation period, but elapsed Since the relative value of time T can be converted and used for determination of the type of effect period, the influence of the shift can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing to switch from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period based on the elapsed time T and the timing to switch from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the presentation period of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, a part of pachinko machine 10 becomes a normal presentation period, and the other pachinko machine 10 becomes a special presentation period, and the player who is playing a game is It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed in a different effect mode from the other pachinko machine 10.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) properly.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  The clocking device 262 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and is configured to have a real time clock (RTC) capable of clocking the current time. The electrical configuration of this clocking device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the clocking device 262. As shown in FIG. The clocking device 262 has an input / output port 350, a device control unit 351, and a register 352. In addition, a clocking device power supply 263 is connected to the clocking device 262. The timepiece device power supply 263 is a power supply dedicated to the timepiece device 262 different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the timepiece device 262 even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. A button type battery is used for the power supply 263 for this clocking device.

  An input / output port 350 and a register 352 are connected to the device control unit 351 of the clocking device 262. The input / output port 350 is communicably connected to the audio lamp controller 113. The device control unit 351 uses (controls) the register 352 to perform various controls such as clocking of the current time and execution of an alarm at a set time. Here, as shown in FIG. 10, the register 352 has a register table composed of a plurality of registers. The register table includes a clocking register 352a and a closing time storage area 352b. That is, as shown in FIG. 9, the register 352 of the clocking device 262 is provided with at least a clocking register 352a and a closing time storage area 352b.

  The clock register 352a is a register for clocking the current time, and the register value is updated every second. Further, the insertion time storage area 352 b is a storage area to which various information such as clock information can be written, and to which stored information can be overwritten. The timing information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is written to the power on time storage area 352b in the main processing (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 when there is information on occurrence of power failure. This is an area (see S1317 in FIG. 28).

  Here, the register table of the register 352 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 schematically shows a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the register 352 can hold up to 8 bits of data at each of 15 addresses from 0H to EH in the register table. Among these addresses, addresses 0H to 6H correspond to the time counting register 352a, and each address represents second, minute, hour, day, day, month, year.

  The details of the clock register 352b will be described by taking an address 0H representing a second as an example. The bit 7 of the address 0H is a non-rewritable bit fixed at L, and the current number of seconds is expressed using bit 0 to bit 6. The symbol “o” attached to bit 7 in FIG. 10 is a symbol indicating that the bit is a non-rewritable bit, and indicates the same meaning in other addresses. Also, bit 0 to bit 6 correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds and 40 seconds respectively, and the number of seconds at the current time depends on whether each bit is H or L It will be shown.

  For example, when the number of seconds at the current time is 5 seconds, both bit 0 representing 1 second and bit 2 representing 4 seconds will be H, and all bits 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be L. This makes it possible to express that 5 seconds, which is the sum of seconds represented by H bits, is the number of seconds of the current time. When the number of seconds at the current time is 29 seconds, bit 0 representing 1 second, bit 3 representing 8 seconds, and bit 5 representing 20 seconds are H, and all bits 1, 2, 4, 6 are L Become. This makes it possible to express that 29 seconds, which is the sum of seconds represented by H bits, is the number of seconds at the current time.

  The address 1H representing a minute, the address 2H representing a time, the address 4H representing a day, the address 5H representing a month, and the address 6H representing a year also correspond to the bit being H similarly to the address 0H representing a second The current time is represented by the sum of the numbers. As for the address 6H representing the year, the last two digits of the year are indicated, and the first two digits of the year are fixed at 20. That is, the address 6H representing a year can represent only between 2000 and 2099.

  Also, for address 3H representing a day of the week, bit 0 to bit 6 correspond to Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, respectively, and one bit is H and the other bits are L and Can be used to express a specific day of the week. For example, if the present is Wednesday, bit 3 becomes H and bit 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 becomes L.

  Addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the insertion time storage area 352b, and can store data of up to 3 bytes. A register for storing seconds (corresponding to address 7H), a register for storing minutes (corresponding to address 8H), and a register for storing time (corresponding to address 9H) are respectively assigned to the entry time storage area 352b. ing. Further, the correspondence between each bit and the second, minute, and time is similar to that of the addresses 0H to 2H.

  That is, bit 0 to bit 6 of the register storing seconds correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively, and bit 0 to bit 6 of the register storing minutes are , Corresponding to 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes, 8 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes and 40 minutes, respectively, bit 0 to bit 5 of the register for storing time are respectively 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 3 It corresponds to 10 hours and 20 hours. In FIG. 10, the symbol “●” is attached to all bits, but it is a symbol indicating that the information can be rewritten and read, and this is a symbol at other addresses. Also have the same meaning.

  The correspondence between each bit of the time counting register 352a and the insertion time storage area 352b and the number of seconds, a fraction, and the like is not limited to the form of this embodiment. For example, the value of each bit may be associated with a power of two. Further, in the present embodiment, although the insertion time storage area 352b is configured by 3 bytes, the number of bytes may be reduced by storing only the values of time and minute as information of stored time, for example. Also, the number of bytes may be increased by adding a register capable of storing milliseconds in addition to seconds, minutes and hours. Furthermore, storage means such as a RAM may be provided outside the time counting device 262 instead of storing the time measurement information in the input time storage area 352b. In this case, the power supply to the storage unit may be performed by the power supply 263 for the clocking device, or a separate power supply dedicated to the storage unit may be provided.

  The addresses AH to CH are registers used to output an alarm signal at a set time, and the addresses DH and EH are registers capable of outputting an interrupt signal at set cycles. When the alarm function or the interrupt function is not used, the addresses AH to EH can be used as the insertion time storage area 352b instead of the addresses 7H to 9H. In this case, since 3 bytes of the addresses 7H to 9H can be reduced, the number of registers can be reduced, so that the cost of the clocking device 262 can be reduced.

  Although only the registers assigned to the addresses 0H to EH are shown in FIG. 10, in addition to these, registers to which addresses other than 0H to EH are assigned are provided, for example, an alarm function or the like. A register or the like is provided to change settings of the interrupt function and the like.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 34) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 36B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 33).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 12, while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the power is turned on, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of power on as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 12 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on, as shown in Fig. 12 (c), The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 12 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when “big hit of the special symbol”, and in FIG. 12 (c) when “out of special symbol”. The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power on fluctuation image area The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a regular effect data table storage area 233b1, a special effect data table storage area 233b2, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, and drawing It has at least a list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and a display special effect flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The normal data table storage area 233b1 and the special data table storage area 233b2 each display the third effect over time as to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 in the normal effect period and the special effect period, respectively Transfer data of the display data table describing the display contents to be displayed on the symbol display device 81 and the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one of the effects displayed by the display data table It is an area in which information and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects , And display data tables corresponding to demonstration effects are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now. The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and the special effect data table storage area 233b2, one display data table corresponding to the round effect and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address Are described (the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 14 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 14).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 33). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 45 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 35B), When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (FIG. 35B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 35 (b) (see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 41 to 44) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 of FIG. 45A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 45B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later (see FIG. 15) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. In step S2103), the pointer updating process (see S3005 in FIG. 41) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 15, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 41). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The update of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3509 in FIG. 46). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3510 in FIG. 46). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 35B) is performed, the process is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 47).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The display special effect flag 233k is a flag indicating whether or not the current effect period is a special effect period. The display special effect flag 233k determines that the clocking data acquired from the clocking device 262 in the process of S1604 in the process of checking the elapsed time (S1311 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is a special effect period. When the special effect flag 223e is set to ON, the special effect command is set to be output to the display control device 113 (S1610 to S1611). Then, the MPU 231 of the display control device 113 sets the display special effect flag 233k to ON based on the reception of the special effect command, whereby the current state of the display control device 113 is the special effect period. It can be determined that the

  The display special effect flag 233k is set to OFF when the normal effect command indicating that the state is the normal effect period is received (S2207 in FIG. 36), and the state is the normal effect period. Are determined by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. In the initial setting performed when the power is turned on, the display special effect flag 233k is configured to be set to off as an initial state.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 899, 99, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S104), and then, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passes along with the passage of the ball at the second entrance port 67 A process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211). If the lottery result this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is the jackpot A (S213).

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot A (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON (S213). If it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot A (ie, it is the jackpot B) (S212: No), the probability change flag 203f is set to OFF, and 100 is set in the hour reduction counter 223e (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and the present process is ended. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the processing of S215, when the jackpot control processing (S1004) of the main processing (see FIG. 25) is executed, the processing branches to S1101: Yes and the third symbol display In the device 81, a jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving / mid-time counter 203e (S217), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). The special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be done.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired To do (S301).

  Next, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit random number table 202a, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S302). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value stored in the first random number table 202a. As mentioned above, the random number value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol at the time of the low probability of the special symbol is three of "7, 307, 582" stored in the first random number table 202a for the time of low probability The random number value that becomes the big hit of the special symbol at the high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238 , 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 656, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ". .

  Further, it can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203f whether the present is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, if the probability change flag 203f is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203f is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the process of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability change flag 203f, and when these values match, special processing is performed. It determines that it is a jackpot of the symbol.

  When it is determined in the process of S302 that the jackpot of the special symbol is determined (S302: Yes), the display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301. (S303). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit of the special symbol with three types (big hit Of A and jackpot B), it is determined which is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot A (probable variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "49 to 99", the jackpot B It is determined that (time and junior high hit) (see FIG. 7 (b)).

  In the process of S303, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S304). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S304, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappear normal reach", "disappear super reach", and "disappear special reach" As the variation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B common, various "shared normal reach", various "shared super reach", various "shared special reach" are defined, and as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot A, various "special reach" Are defined, and as the variation pattern of hit / out-of-common use, various common common reach, various common super reach, and common special reach are specified.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S302: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a back and forth reach, a reach other than the back and forth, or a complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S306). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S304, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the process of S304 or the process of S306 is finished, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S304 or the process of S306 is set (S307). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S305 is set (S308). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S308 is finished, the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) to determine whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a start winning. It is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the process of S407, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, lottery success or failure (whether jackpot or not) in the special symbol, its stop type (in the case of jackpot, jackpot type), and its The variation pattern is predicted (S407). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406, and the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A) It is determined by comparing one by one with the (hit value). As mentioned above, the random number value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol at the time of the low probability of the special symbol is three of "7, 307, 582" stored in the first random number table 202a for the time of low probability The random number value that becomes the big hit of the special symbol at the high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238 , 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 656, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ". .

  Further, it can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203f whether the present is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, if the probability change flag 203f is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203f is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the process of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability change flag 203f, and when these values match, special processing is performed. It determines that it is a jackpot of the symbol.

  And, when it is determined that it is a big hit of the special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol big hit type table, Of the two types of special symbol jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B), it is determined which jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot A (probable variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "49 to 99" It is determined that (time and junior high hit) (see FIG. 8A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out, the front and back out of reach reach as a stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406. It is determined whether it is a reach other than the back and forth deviation or the complete outlier. Here, if the probability change flag 203f is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability time, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", it is determined to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", it is determined to be reach other than out of order If it is "98, 99", it is determined that the back and forth reach is reached. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203f is off, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, to determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", it is determined to be reach other than out of order If it is "98, 99", it is determined that the back and forth reach is reached.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is a lottery result predicted from the fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 7A) stored in the ROM 202, and a predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit) It is selected according to the type). In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as a fluctuation pattern for deviation, various kinds of "disappearing (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various, "disappearing special reach" "Various is specified as the variation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B common, various" shared normal reach ", various" shared super reach ", various" shared special reach ", as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot A" special " Various types of reach are defined, and various types of shared normal reach, various types of shared super reach, and various types of shared special reach are defined as the variation patterns for hit and off. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  If the process of S407 predicts the lottery success or failure in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the jackpot type), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery success or failure, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The winning information information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prize information command, it extracts yes or no, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and stores the information in the prize information storage area 223a as prize information. , It is determined whether or not the display of the continuous advance notice effect starts.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-span-medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The hour-time counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-shortening counter 203f is 1 or more, the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first entrance 64 is opened. This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the first ball entrance 64 is restrained from entering the ball in the jackpot of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 7 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / middle counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 7 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S 613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time thereof are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the first entry ball opening The opening period of the motorized accessory attached to 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / storing counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball inlet 64 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is performed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electrically driven combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized combination is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electrically operated combination is performed when the motorized combination opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry hole 67, and when the ball passes. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry hole 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained (S702) . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed the second entrance ball opening 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second entrance ball opening 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 23, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. Note that, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 24, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) or the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, it transmits the number-of-rounds command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25) to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S1005). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the motorized part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (refer to FIG. 18), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S303 or the processing of S305 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 18). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 20), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83 Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 20), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( Turn on).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until it reaches the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can start from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1102). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1102, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1102: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1103, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1105). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls are present. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1106, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1107), and this processing ends. Do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1106: No), this processing is ended.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1318 (see FIG. 28) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of step S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 28), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing in S1318. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1318 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1318 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-down process of S1318 is performed (see S1316 in FIG. 28). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is performed, the process of S1208 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). Then, time acquisition processing is executed (S1211), interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110. The details of the time acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1208 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1204 to S1206 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process is transferred to S1210, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The process is executed (S1211), interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process shifts to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the time acquisition process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. This time acquisition process (S1211) is a process for storing the time when the power is turned on. The time information acquired by this process is used to determine the elapsed time since the power is turned on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 28) performed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later. Be

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the time acquisition process (S1211). When the time acquisition process (S1211) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is turned on (S1501). If it is not turned on (S1501: No), the clocking device Information on the current time is acquired from the time measurement register 352a of 262 (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S1501: Yes), the time information stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the clock 262 is read (S1502), the closing time storage area 352b. Whether time information is stored is determined (S1503). As a result, when it is determined that the time information is not stored (S1503: No), the information of the current time is acquired from the clock register 352a of the clock device 262 (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time information is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timer 262 (S1503: Yes), the process of S1504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1505.

  In the process of S1505, the time information read out in the process of S1502 or S1504 is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 (S1505), and the process is ended.

  As described above, since time information for determining the type of effect period is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 by this processing, the timing at which the start-up processing is performed in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the hole If it combines, the timing by which time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f of each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f is matched, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 28) can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10 The timing for switching from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period can be made based on the elapsed time T. Thereby, the person concerned of a hole can unify the presentation period of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the hall all at once. Therefore, with some pachinko machines 10 being in a normal rendering period and the other pachinko machines 10 being in a special rendering period, the player who is playing the game is executed in a rendering mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity with

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the clocking device 262, and the type of the presentation period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired during the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in the inside, and the type of the presentation period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the clock devices 262 of the pachinko machines 10 deviate from each other due to aged deterioration or the like, the mutually deviated time information is not directly used for determining the type of presentation period, but elapsed Since the relative value of time T can be converted and used for determination of the type of effect period, the influence of the shift can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing to switch from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period based on the elapsed time T and the timing to switch from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the presentation period of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, a part of pachinko machine 10 becomes a normal presentation period, and the other pachinko machine 10 becomes a special presentation period, and the player who is playing a game is It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed in a different effect mode from the other pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a state where the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, in the off state), time information when the power is turned on is The time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM is stored in the time information storage area 223f when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off in the main processing (FIG. 28) described later. It is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262. Since the clocking device 262 operates based on power supply from the clocking device power supply 263 even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, the pachinko machine 10 stores the time information stored in the closing time storage area 352b. It is held even in the power-off state. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on when the power is turned on, the power is stored in the on time storage area 352b of the timer 262 instead of the current time information. The time information held even during the power-off state is read out and stored in the time information storage area 223 f of the RAM 223.

  As a result, for example, when one of the pachinko machines 10 needs to be turned off during operation due to failure of the pachinko machine 10, substrate replacement is required, or an on-site inspection is performed. Also, it is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 by time acquisition processing when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off last time, only by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. The time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262 can be stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 again when the power-off state is set. Therefore, if power is simultaneously turned on to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in a hole with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, then one pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Also, only by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on again, the time information when the power is turned on all at once can be stored in the time information storage area 223f. Before and after power-on, the elapsed time T can be determined based on the same time information. Therefore, based on the same elapsed time T as other gaming machines, it is possible to match the timing for switching from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period and the timing for switching from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period. It is possible to suppress the timing at which the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the production mode from being shifted, and the player who is playing the game feels uncomfortable for the production being performed in a different production mode from the other pachinko machines 10 Can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is detected in the time acquisition process (see S1211 in FIG. 26) that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, it is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262. Although the time information is read (see S1502) and controlled to be stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 (see S1505), the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, a switch means used exclusively for time acquisition processing different from the RAM erase switch 122 is provided, and in the time acquisition process (S1211), the input time storage area of the clock 262 when the switch means is on. The time information stored in 352 b may be read out.

  Thus, the time information stored in the insertion time storage area 352b of the time counting device 262 is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 while holding the information stored in the RAM 203 before being put into the power-off state. Can. Therefore, even if it was turned off in the state where the holding balls are left or was turned off during the high probability state of the special symbol, it was left based on the reactivation of the power supply. It is possible to suppress the disappearance of the holding ball and the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the disadvantage to the player.

  Further, instead of using the switch means such as the RAM erase switch 122 etc., the time information stored in the input time storage area 352 b of the time counting device 262 is used when the time measured by the time counting device 262 is a predetermined time zone. It may be configured to read out. In this case, the business hours of the hall may be set as, for example, 10:00 to 22:45 as the predetermined time zone.

  As a result, when the employee of the hall turns on the power to the pachinko machine 10 that has been turned off during business hours without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 due to a mistake, the power is restored again. The time when the charging is performed is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 233, and it is possible to suppress that the elapsed time T deviates from the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off. Therefore, the timing at which the rendering period is switched can be reliably synchronized between the pachinko machine 10 in the power-off state and the pachinko machine 10 in the non-power-off state during business hours. In addition, since the time information stored in the time information storage area 233f is selected according to the time information (clocking information) clocked by the clocking device 262, the employee of the hall performs a special operation when the power is turned on. There is no need to do this, and it is possible to reduce the labor of the hall employees.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time information read out in the process of S1502 or S1504 is configured to be stored in the time information storage area 223f, but instead, it is provided in the register 352. It may be configured to be stored in unused bits of the register table (see FIG. 10). The bits not used here refer to, for example, the bit 6 of the address BH and the bits 4 to 7 of the address EH, and among the bits to which the symbol “●” is attached in FIG. Point to the bit. As described above, these bits are bits capable of rewriting and reading information, and even if data are rewritten, they are bits that do not affect the operation of the clocking device 262 at all. As a result, the register table provided in the register 352 can be efficiently used, and therefore, the address allocated to the insertion time storage area 352b can be reduced.

  Specifically, for example, information representing a second is stored in bit 0 to bit 6 of address 7H, and information representing a minute is stored in bit 7 of address 7H and bit 0 to bit 5 of address 8H. And information representing time may be stored in bit 4 to bit 7 of the address EH. As a result, the address 9H not used for storing data can be reduced, and the capacity of the register 352 can be reduced, so that the price of the clocking device 262 can be reduced.

  In the register table provided in the register 352 of the present embodiment, in FIG. 10, the bit attached with the sign of “o” is a non-rewritable bit of L fixed, but the sign of these “o” The bit attached with may be configured to be rewritable, and the time information read out in the process of S1502 or the process of S1504 may be stored also in the bit with the sign of “o”. As a result, since the register table can be used more efficiently than storing time information only in the bit to which the symbol "●" is added, the capacity of the register 352 can be further reduced. It is possible to further reduce the price of 262.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1301 has been executed (S1301), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the process of S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, it is the process concerning S1302 to S1311 mainly regarding display (rendering) to determine whether 1 msec has elapsed, while it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S1312 and the variable display setting processing of S1313 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1312 is performed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process shifts to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, an elapsed time confirmation process is executed (S1311). In the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), the current effect period is determined based on time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262. The details of the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process of performing a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 is executed (S1312). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1313 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1314). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1314 (S1314: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1316), and stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 The power-on time information is written to the power-on time storage area 352b of the timer 262 (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1314 (S1314: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1315) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1315: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1315: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, an elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this elapsed time confirmation process (S1311). In this elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), it is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 The present presentation period is determined on the basis of.

  In the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), first, the information of the current time is read from the time register 352a of the time counting device 262 (S1601), and the read current time and the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 The elapsed time T from the power on is calculated based on (S1602). Here, as a method of calculating the elapsed time T, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223 f of the RAM 223 may be subtracted from the information indicating the current time read from the time register 352 a of the time counting device 262. For example, the information of the current time read from the clock register 352a indicates AM 10:15 (that is, all bits of address 0H are L, bits 0, 2, 4 of address 1H are H, bits 1, 3, 5-7 are Information that indicates that the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f is AM 9:00 (that is, all of the addresses 0H and 1H are L, and bit 4 of the address 2H is H and bits 0 to 3 to 5 are L) When the bit of L is L, bit 0, 3 of address 2H is H, and bits 1, 2, 4 to 7 is L), the elapsed time T takes the difference between 10:15 and 9:00, and 75 minutes It is calculated.

  Then, based on the calculated elapsed time T and the effect switching table (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 222, the current effect period is specified (S1603), and it is determined whether the current effect period is a special effect period. (S1604).

  As a result of the process of S1604, when it is determined that it is not a special effect period (ie, it is a normal effect period) (S1604: No), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S1605). If the special effect flag 223e is on (S1605: Yes), this means that the special effect period has been switched to the normal effect period in the current main processing, so the special effect flag is turned off (S1606). Next, a normal effect command for setting the effect mode of the round effect or demonstration effect executed by the display control device 114 to the normal effect mode is set (S1607), and the back surface displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A rear surface image change command for changing the image to the rear surface image of the normal mode is set (S1608), and this processing ends. Further, in the process of S1605, when the special effect flag is off (S1605: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a special effect period as a result of the process of S1604 (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S1609). If the special effect flag 223e is on (S1609: Yes), this process ends. If the special effect flag 223e is off, it means that the normal effect period has been switched to the special effect period in the main processing of this time, so the special effect flag is turned on (S1610). Next, a special effect command for setting the effect mode of the round effect or demonstration effect executed by the display control device 114 as a special effect mode is set (S1611), and the back surface displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A rear surface image change command for changing the image to the rear surface image of the normal mode is set (S1612), and this processing ends.

  Since whether it is a special effect period or a normal effect period is indicated depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, the variation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) ), When selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 is checked and it is a special effect period or not It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is on or not. Therefore, the process for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, switching of the special effect flag 223e is performed when the effect period switches, but the special effect flag 223e may be updated each time an elapsed time check process is performed. Further, the setting of the normal effect command (S1607) or the setting of the special effect command (S1611) may be performed each time the elapsed time confirmation process is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether it has been done (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), fluctuation pattern selection processing for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern is performed (S1402), and the processing returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type selected here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114. Details of the variation pattern selection process (S1402) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). When the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The number of times of suspension N of the variable display in is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1407). Further, in the process of S1407, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1407 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination is performed. Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1407 is the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. In addition, if the process of S1408 is performed, the holding ball number command for a display for notifying the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b to the display control apparatus 114 will be set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1407, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1406: No), it is next determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1408). Then, when a winning information command is received (S1408: Yes), various information (pass or fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1409). When the process of S1409 is finished, next, the winning information (approval, stop type, fluctuation pattern) extracted in the process of S1409 is the first of the vacant areas (first to fourth areas) of the winning information storage area 223a. Store in the area (S1410),
Return to main processing.

  In the process of S1408, when the prize information command has not been received (S1408: No), it is next determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1411). Then, when the round number command is received (S1411: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1412), and the display round number command according to the extracted round number is set ( S1413), the process ends. The round number command for display set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1411 (S1411: No), it is determined whether or not other commands have been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1419) Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the variation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection process (S1402). This variation pattern selection process (S1402) is executed in the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the third symbol This is processing for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern to be executed in the display device 81.

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2701), and then it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S2702).

  Then, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223 e is on, the fluctuation pattern type for the special effect period is extracted from the fluctuation pattern types based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (S 2703) ), End this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2702: No), the normal effect period of the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 The variation pattern type for the target is extracted (S2704), and this processing ends.

  Based on the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S2703 or S2704, the variation pattern effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, since the variation pattern types for different effect periods are selected depending on whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on, various effects can be executed, and the player can enjoy the game It can be improved. Therefore, even if the player is playing the game for a long time, only the same effect occurs, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game. In addition, as described above, since the special rendering period of 10 minutes and the regular rendering period of 50 minutes are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone of the special rendering period and the time zone of the normal rendering period can do. Therefore, it is possible to start the game aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect aspect suited to the player's taste is performed for each player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1313). This variation display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation presentation, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1313), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S1701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1402) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) In step S1703), the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1706: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, in the process of S1709, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710 . In the process of S1710, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710). The variable display setting process is ended. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 47. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is enabled to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs and fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 33) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S1801) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 34, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S1901. After repeating the process including the process of S1902 a plurality of times, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simplified image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 45A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3302 of FIG. 45A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. As a result, during this time, a simple command is made so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B). A determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and a simplified display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 35B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When the display variation pattern command is received through the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, the interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S1806, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 35 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 35B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, ie If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is performed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2104). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2104), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 12 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2109) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2203).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a special effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if it is determined that there is a special effect command (S2204: Yes), the display special effect flag 233k is selected. When it is turned on (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201. If the special effect flag is turned on, the round number display data table corresponding to the round effect of the special effect mode is selected in the round number command process (S2213) described later. Further, in a demonstration display process (S3017) described later, a demonstration display data table corresponding to a demonstration effect of a special effect mode is selected. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, round effects and demonstration effects are performed in a special effect mode.

  By switching the effect which has been executed in the normal effect mode to the special effect mode, the player can be made to feel the novelty, so it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous, It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  If it is determined in the process of S2304 that there is no special effect command (S2204: No), it is then determined whether there is a normal effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If it is determined that there is a normal effect command (S2206: Yes), the display special effect flag 233k is turned off (S2207), and the process returns to S2201. If the special effect flag is turned off, the round number display data table corresponding to the round effect of the normal effect mode is selected in the round number command process (S2213) described later. Further, in a demonstration display process (S3017) to be described later, a demonstration display data table corresponding to a demonstration effect of a normal effect mode is selected. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, round effects and demonstration effects are performed in a normal effect mode.

  By switching the effect that has been executed in the special effect mode to the normal effect mode, the player can be made to feel novelty, so it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous, It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the special effect command output from the audio lamp control device 113, the effect mode of the effect to be executed in the third symbol display device is a special effect mode and a normal effect mode. It has been decided which presentation mode to execute, but in place of this, it is possible to read out the time information of the clocking device 262 by the display control device 114, and based on the read time, the special effect period or the normal effect It may be determined whether it is a period.

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is no normal rendering command, then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2208: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2209) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing (S2209). The variation pattern command processing (S2209) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2304), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81 while extracting the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2302. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2208 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2208: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2210), If there is a display variation type command (S2210: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2211), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S2401), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It sets to OFF (S2403), and returns to command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2104), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the process of S2402.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2210 that there is no display stop type command (S2210: No), it is then determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), If there is a display round number command (S2212: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, it is checked whether or not the display special effect flag 233k is on (S2601), and if the display special effect flag 233k is on (S2601: Yes), it corresponds to the received command. The selected round number display data table is selected from the special effect data table storage area 233b2 and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2602). On the other hand, if the display special effect flag 233k is off (S2601: No), the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is selected from the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S2602).

  Since the number-of-rounds display data table selected from any of the normal effect data table 233b1 and the special effect data table 233b2 is set in the display data table 233d depending on whether the special effect flag is on or off, the effect is periodically generated. The aspect can be switched. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel novelty every time the effect mode is switched, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2604).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2602 or S2603, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2605), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2606). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S2607), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2212 that there is no display round number command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2214), If there is an image change command (S2214: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2215) will be described. FIG. 40 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S2801) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A and B), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on. The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. .

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is displayed according to the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2802 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2214 that there is no rear surface image change command (S2214: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2216), and the error command exists. For example (S2216: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (b). FIG. 40 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2901). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S 2902), and the error command is The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2216 that there is no error command (S2216: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2218), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

  In the process of S2201 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes ), The processing of S2202 to S2218 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2218 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2108) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 12, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 37) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 38), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other commands are those Perform processing to discard without executing processing corresponding to.

  Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 37) executed in this case, in the process of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d. In addition, since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. In the process of S2302, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and a process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 41, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S3001: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing (S2104), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Decide various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3003 (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is the End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3205), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), the present process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3202: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In task processing (S2104), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3006 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and for each sprite It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and it is the timing to perform the finalized display, so first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3015) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect to be performed. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is not on but off in the process of S3009 (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display processing is executed (S3017) ), Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Here, the details of the demonstration display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a demonstration display process. This process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the finalized display effect.

  In the demonstration display effect, first, it is determined whether or not the display special effect flag 233k is on (S3801). Then, when it is determined that the display special effect flag 233k is on (S3801: Yes), it indicates that the present is a special effect period, so in order to execute the demonstration effect in the special effect mode, the special effect The demo display data table is acquired from the data table storage area 233b2 and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3802), and the process shifts to the processing of S3804.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the display special effect flag 233k is not on (that is, off) (S3801: No), it indicates that the present is the normal effect period, so the demonstration effect is executed in the normal effect mode In order to do this, a demonstration display data table is acquired from the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and set in the display data table storage area 233d (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3804.

  In the process of S3804 performed after the process of S3802 or S3803, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3804). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3805). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3006), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3007), this processing is ended, and display setting processing (S2103) Return.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting a display data table which specifies to stop and display the image of (FIG. 12 (b) or (c)) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 45 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 45 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3402). In this processing of S3402, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3402 (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the process of S3401, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3403, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 35B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 41 to 44) are performed, drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) (see S3301: No in FIG. 45A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233 to indicate that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3506 (S3506: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3510), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  In the process of S3513, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S 3513 (S 3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 3602). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 35B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, a period in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode (normal effect period) and a period in which the effect is executed in a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode ( There are two types of periods, ie, the special effect period), and it is determined by the audio lamp control device 114 based on the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 which period is currently. Then, when the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110, the variation pattern type corresponding to the determined presentation period is selected, and variation is made in third symbol display device 81 based on the selected variation pattern type. A pattern effect is performed.

  Also, each time it is determined by the sound lamp control device 114 that the effect period has been switched to a different effect period, a command corresponding to the effect period after the change is output to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 determines the current effect period based on the command output by the audio lamp control device 114, and selects the display data table corresponding to the round effect or the demonstration effect based on the determined effect period. Do.

  Thereby, the variation pattern effect, the round effect, and the demonstration effect of the demonstration effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 are executed in the normal effect mode or in the special effect mode according to the elapsed time. Do. Therefore, since the player can be made to feel novelty whenever switching to a different rendering mode, it is possible to suppress that the game becomes monotonous, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the effect period is determined by the sound lamp control device 114, the time is determined from the time information (time information) of the time counting device 262, and the type of effect period is switched according to the time zone. Rather, the elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in the startup process and the time information acquired in the elapsed time confirmation process, and the type of effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. There is. Thereby, even if the time information of the clocking devices 262 of the respective pachinko machines 10 deviates from each other due to aged deterioration or the like in the hall where the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the time information of the mutually deviated time information is displayed The influence of the deviation can be reduced because it can be converted to a relative value of elapsed time T and used for determination of the type of the rendering period, not directly for the determination of the type of.

  Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing to switch from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period based on the elapsed time T and the timing to switch from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the presentation period of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, a part of pachinko machine 10 becomes a normal presentation period, and the other pachinko machine 10 becomes a special presentation period, and the player who is playing a game is It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed in a different effect mode from the other pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the time information acquired in the start-up process based on the power-on is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262 Since the device 262 continues to be supplied with power from the clock device power supply 263 even in the power-off state, the time information stored in the on-time storage area 352b is held even in the power-off state. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, it is stored not in the time information clocked by the clocking device 262 at the time of the power on but in the on time storage area storage area 352b. The time information that has been stored is stored in the time information storage area 223 f of the RAM 223 and is used to determine the elapsed time T.

  Thus, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is electrically disconnected, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an inspection of the entrance is performed. Even when it is necessary to set the state, time acquisition processing when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off last time, just by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on Thus, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 and stored in the input time storage area 352b of the time counting device 262 can be stored again in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 .

  Therefore, if power is simultaneously turned on to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in a hole with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, then one pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Also, simply by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on again, the elapsed time T can be determined based on time information when the power is turned on all at once. Therefore, based on the same elapsed time T as other gaming machines, it is possible to match the timing for switching from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period and the timing for switching from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period. It is possible to suppress the timing at which the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the production mode from being shifted, and the player who is playing the game feels uncomfortable for the production being performed in a different production mode from the other pachinko machines 10 Can be suppressed.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 53, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, time information (clocking information) is acquired from the clocking device 262, and the type of effect period is determined based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, the time information (clocking information) acquired from the clocking device 262 based on turning on the power is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the clocking device The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (clocking information) clocked by 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence relationship between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is the normal effect period or the special effect period, and is specified It is comprised so that the presentation according to the presentation period may be performed.

  In addition, when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at the time of turning on the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turning on time storage area 352b Are configured to be stored.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the time counting device 262 is configured to count the elapsed time since the power is turned on, the type of the present effect period is determined based on the elapsed time, and the determined effect period It is configured to execute a corresponding effect.

  More specifically, an elapsed time counter 352c whose count value is updated every one second is provided in the register 352 of the time counting device 262, and power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b. The elapsed time T of is identified. Then, based on the elapsed time T and the effect switching table 222b, the type of the effect period can be specified.

  When the RAM erase switch 122 is off at the time of power on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is on at the time of power on. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is configured to be held without being initialized.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that an elapsed time counter 352 c is provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 instead of the closing time storage area 352 b. It is a point that The partial process included in the start-up process (FIG. 26) and the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
First, with reference to FIG. 48, the electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the timing device 262 of the present embodiment has the register 352, and the register 352 has a register table composed of a plurality of registers shown in FIG. The register table includes a clock register 352a and an elapsed time counter 352c. That is, in the clocking device 262 of this embodiment, an elapsed time counter 352c is provided in place of the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The elapsed time counter 352 c is a counter used to specify an elapsed time since power on based on the count value. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352 c is updated every one second, and is initialized (reset) based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c specifies the elapsed time T from the power on in the elapsed time check process 2 (see S1331 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect switching table 222b. Is used to specify the type of presentation period based on

  Here, the details of the elapsed time counter 352c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 schematically shows a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. The registers assigned to addresses 0H to 6H of the register table (clocking register 352a) and the registers assigned to the addresses AH to EH are the registers assigned to the addresses 0H to 6H in the first embodiment, and the addresses AH to EH. It has the same configuration and function as the registers assigned to. On the other hand, the addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the elapsed time counter 352c. In the first embodiment, in the entry time storage area 352b, the register for storing seconds, the register for storing minutes, and the register for storing time are allocated to the addresses 7H to 9H, respectively. A register to count, a register to count minutes, and a register to count time are assigned to the addresses 7H to 9H, respectively.

  The register for counting the second assigned to the address 7H has the same configuration as the register (the register assigned to the address 0H) representing the second of the time-counting register 352a described in the first embodiment. The number of seconds in the elapsed time is represented depending on whether each bit of bit 0 to bit 6 corresponding to second, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds is H or L, respectively. The register that counts this second is updated one by one every 1 second from the 0 second state (all bits are L states), and the 0 second state when the register is updated in the 59 second state ( All bits are configured to return to the state of L).

  The register for counting the minutes assigned to the address 8H has the same configuration as the register (the register assigned to the address 1H) representing the minutes of the time-counting register 352a, and is 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes, 8 minutes Depending on whether each bit of bit 0 to bit 6 corresponding to each of the minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, and 40 minutes is H or L, it is expressed what the fraction of the elapsed time is. The register that counts this minute is updated one by one every time the register that counts the second is updated from the 59-second state to the 0-second state (all bits are L), and the state is 59 minutes. When the register is updated, it is configured to return to the 0 minute state (all bits are in the L state).

  Further, the register for counting the time allocated to the address 9H has the same configuration as the register (the register allocated to the address 2H) representing the time of the clocking register 352a, and has 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 3 hours. Depending on whether each bit of bit 0 to bit 5 corresponding to time, 10 hours, and 20 hours is H or L, it is expressed how many hours are in the elapsed time. The register that counts this time is updated one by one every time the register that counts the minute is updated from the 59-minute state to the 0-minute state (all bits are in the L state), and in the 24-hour state When the register is updated, it is configured to return to the 0 hour state (all bits are in the L state).

  The elapsed time from the power-on can be specified by referring to the count value of the register that counts these seconds, minutes, and times. Then, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized. Therefore, in the hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the elapsed time of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on the power to the plurality of gaming machines simultaneously with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. All count values of the counter 352c are initialized. Therefore, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player playing the game has an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  Further, as described above, the clocking device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the clocking device power supply 263, which is a power supply different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, it is possible to continue the update of the count value by the elapsed time counter 352c. Then, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the elapsed time counter 352c at the time of turning on the power is The count value is updated from the continuation of the count value. Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is electrically disconnected, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or inspection of the entrance is performed. Even if it is necessary to do so, it is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from being initialized simply by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is possible to suppress deviation of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been switched off. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player who is playing a game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 in an effect mode It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity with the effect being performed.

  In the present embodiment, the elapsed time counter 352c is provided separately from the clock register 352a in the register 352 of the clock device 262, but the clock register 352a is turned on each time the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch turned off. The timing information of may be reset so that all of bit0 to bit6 are L. Thereby, the time counting register 352a can be used similarly to the elapsed time counter 352c. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the elapsed time counter 352c, and the number of registers can be reduced, so that the price can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113, the elapsed time T is calculated based on the time information (clocking information) acquired from the clocking device 262, but instead, it is fixed time The elapsed time T may be determined on the basis of the information (e.g., 10:00) and the time information (clocking information) counted by the clocking device 262. In this case, the information on the fixed time may be defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 or may be stored in the register 352 of the timing device 262. Thus, when power is turned on, time information (clocking information) counted by the clocking device 262 is acquired, or when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f is stored in the register 352 of the clocking device 262. Since it is not necessary to store the input time storage area 352b, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

Regarding Control Processing in Second Embodiment
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. The start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In each of the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 among the startup processes, the same process as each process of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the start-up process in the second embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) is replaced with the time acquisition process (S1211) of the start-up process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. To do).

  That is, in the start-up process in the second embodiment, after the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the elapsed time counter initialization process is executed (S1221), and the interrupt permission is set (S1212). ), Shift to main processing. The elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) is a process for initializing the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c, and is a process for counting the elapsed time starting from the power on.

  Here, details of the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) will be described with reference to FIG. In the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221), first, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1511). Then, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch is on (S1511: Yes), this process ends and the process returns to the start-up process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is not on (that is, off) (S1511: No), the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 is initialized (S1512) , End this process.

  As described above, in the elapsed time counter initialization process, when the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352 c is initialized. Therefore, in the hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the elapsed time of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on the power to the plurality of gaming machines simultaneously with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. All count values of the counter 352c are initialized. Therefore, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player playing the game has an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  In the elapsed time counter initialization process, when the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the continuation of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c at the time of turning on the power is continued. The count value is updated. Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is electrically disconnected, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or inspection of the entrance is performed. Even if it is necessary to do so, it is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from being initialized simply by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is possible to suppress deviation of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been switched off. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player who is playing a game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 in an effect mode It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity with the effect being performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Among the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, in each processing of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318 and S1319, S1301 of the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319 is executed. Then, in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, when the processing of S1310 is completed, in the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. Instead, the elapsed time check process 2 (S1331) is executed.

  That is, in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, after the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S1310) is executed, the elapsed time confirmation processing 2 is executed (S1331), and the processing shifts to command determination processing (S1313) . The elapsed time check process 2 (S1331) is a process for specifying the elapsed time since the power is turned on based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c, and determining the type of effect period.

  In the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, processing equivalent to the processing of S1317 in the main processing (FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is not performed. The processing of S1317 of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is provided with the time information at power on stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 in the register 352 of the clock 262 This processing is performed to store the time information in the power on time storage area 352b and to hold time data even in the power-off state, and the power-off state when the power is turned on again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is a process required to specify the elapsed time T based on the same time information as before. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, instead of determining the elapsed time T based on time information at the time of power on, the power is turned on based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. It is not necessary to hold the time information at power-on in the power-off state, and it is not necessary to perform the processing corresponding to S1317.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, an elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Elapsed time check process 2 (S1331) is a process executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for determining the type of the current effect period based on the elapsed time T from the power on. It is.

  Of the elapsed time check process 2 (S1331), in each process of S1603 to 1612, the same process as the process of each of the elapsed time check process (S1311) in the first embodiment (S1311) is executed. Then, in elapsed time check processing 2 (S1331) in the second embodiment, each processing of S1621 and S1622 is executed instead of each processing of S1601 and S1602 of the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) in the first embodiment. Be done.

  That is, when the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) is executed, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c of the time counting device 262 is read (S1621), and the elapsed time T from power on is calculated based on the read count value. It specifies (S1622) and shifts to processing of S1603. And as above-mentioned, regarding each processing after S1603, the processing same as each processing after S1603 of the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) in the first embodiment is executed.

  The type of the current effect period is determined by the elapsed time check process 2 (S1331), and the state of the special effect flag 223e is changed according to the type of the effect period determined. Therefore, it is indicated whether it is a special effect period or a normal effect period depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, so that the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). When selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110 in S1402 of 30), the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 is confirmed and the special effect period It is not necessary to determine whether it is or not, and it is sufficient to simply check whether the special effect flag 223e is on. Therefore, the process for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the register 352 of the time counting device 262 is provided with the elapsed time counter 352c whose count value is updated every one second, and based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b. , And an elapsed time T from turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 is specified. Then, based on the elapsed time T and the effect switching table 222b, the type of the effect period can be specified.

  When the RAM erase switch 122 is off at the time of power on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is on at the time of power on. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is configured to be held without being initialized.

  Thereby, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, so a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed. In the existing hall, all the count values of the elapsed time counter 352c of each pachinko machine 10 are initialized only by turning on the power at the same time to the plurality of gaming machines with the RAM erase switch 122 off. . Therefore, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player playing the game has an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  Further, as described above, the clocking device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the clocking device power supply 263, which is a power supply different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, it is possible to continue the update of the count value by the elapsed time counter 352c. Then, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the elapsed time counter 352c at the time of turning on the power is The count value is updated from the continuation of the count value. Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is electrically disconnected, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or inspection of the entrance is performed. Even if it is necessary to do so, it is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from being initialized simply by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is possible to suppress deviation of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been switched off. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player who is playing a game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 in an effect mode It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity with the effect being performed.

<Modification Example of Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the elapsed time check process 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the clock 262 is acquired. Although the type of effect period is determined from the elapsed time T determined based on the acquired count value and the effect period table 222b, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b in the timing device 262 is used. Alternatively, the type of effect period may be determined based on the determination, and only the determination result may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this case, the determination result may be notified each time the type of the effect period is determined, or may be notified only when switching to a different effect period. In addition, in determining the type of effect period, the effect period table 222b provided in the ROM 222 may be read to determine the type of effect period, or the register 352 is equivalent to the information specified in the effect period table 222b. The information of (1) may be defined, and the type of the effect period may be determined with reference to this information. As a result, since the elapsed time check process 2 can be simplified, the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the elapsed time counter 352 c is provided only in the register 352 of the timing device 262, but similar counter means may be provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the counter value is cleared (reset) when the power is turned off, but when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, With reference to the value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the time counting device 262, the counter value may be set in the counter means of the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, it is not necessary to acquire the counter value from the elapsed time counter 352c of the time counting device 262 every time the elapsed time check process 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 The processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced because it is sufficient to refer to the value of the counter means provided in the above.

Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, time information (clocking information) is acquired from the clocking device 262, and the type of effect period is determined based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, the time information (clocking information) acquired from the clocking device 262 based on turning on the power is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the clocking device The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (clocking information) clocked by 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence relationship between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is the normal effect period or the special effect period, and is specified It is comprised so that the presentation according to the presentation period may be performed.

  In addition, when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at the time of turning on the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turning on time storage area 352b Are configured to be stored.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a clock counter 223g which is updated by decrementing the counter value by 1 every 1 millisecond. The type of effect period can be identified based on the counter value of.

  In addition, when the RAM erase switch 122 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the counter value of the clock counter 223g is configured to set an initial value of 3599999 (counter value corresponding to one hour). ing. When the power is turned off, the counter value is stored in the counter value storage area 352e provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262, and is maintained even in the power-off state. When the RAM erase switch 122 is on when the power is turned on, the counter value stored in the counter value storage area 352e provided in the register 352 of the clocking device 262 is used as the counter value of the clocking counter 223g. The initial value of the clock counter 223g is set based on the power-off state and the period of the power-off state.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that a clock counter 223g is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a clocking device 262. In the second register 352, the disconnection time storage area 352d and the counter value storage area 352e are provided instead of the insertion time storage area 352b. The partial process included in the start-up process (FIG. 26) and the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a RAM 223 as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the RAM 223, a clock counter 223g is provided in place of the time information storage area 223f provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The time counter 223g is used to specify the type of effect period according to the counter value. In the time counter 223g, 1 is subtracted from the previous value each time the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed by the counter update processing (S1341) executed in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113. After reaching 0, the loop counter returns to the initial value 3599999. Since the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed every 1 ms, the time counter 223g returns to the initial value every 3600 seconds (that is, 1 hour). The relationship between the count value of the clock counter 223g and the type of effect period is that the normal effect period is determined when the counter value is in the range of 0 to 299,999 (counter value equivalent to 50 minutes), and the counter value is 3000000 to In the range of 3599999 (counter value corresponding to 10 minutes), it is determined to be a special effect period. That is, every time the counter makes a round, a 50-minute normal rendering period and a 10-minute special rendering period come.

  As described above, if one game is played for one hour, the game is always switched to a different presentation period, so that the player can feel novelty by switching the presentation period. Therefore, even if the player is playing the game for a long time, only the same effect occurs, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game. Further, since the 50-minute normal effect period and the 10-minute special effect period are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time period to be the special effect period and the time period to be the normal effect period. . Therefore, it is possible to start the game aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect aspect suited to the player's taste is performed for each player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the clocking device 262 of the present embodiment has the register 352, and the register 352 has a register table composed of a plurality of registers shown in FIG. The register table includes a clock register 352a, a disconnection time storage area 352d, and a counter value storage area 352e. That is, the timing device 262 of the present embodiment is provided with a disconnection time storage area 352 d and a counter value storage area 352 e instead of the insertion time storage area 352 b provided in the register 352 in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The disconnection time storage area 352 d is a register that stores time information (clocking information) being clocked by the clocking device 262 at that time, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The counter value storage area 352e is a register that stores the counter value of the clock counter 223g at that time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

  The disconnection time storage area 352 d and the counter value storage area 352 e will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. The registers allocated to the addresses 00H to 06H of the register table (clocking register 352a) and the registers allocated to the addresses 0DH to 11H are the registers allocated to the addresses 0H to 6H in the first embodiment, and the addresses AH to EH. It has the same configuration and function as the registers assigned to. On the other hand, the addresses 07H to 09H correspond to the disconnection time storage area 352d, and the addresses 0AH to 0CH correspond to the counter value storage area 352e. In the first embodiment, in the entry time storage area 352b, the register for storing the second, the register for storing the minute, and the register for storing the time are respectively allocated to the addresses 7H to 9H. The area 352 d also has the same configuration as this.

  On the other hand, in the counter value storage area 352e, a power of 2 is associated with each bit. Specifically, in the bit 0 to bit 7 of the register assigned to the address 0A, the second power of 0 (i.e. 1), the second power of 2 (i.e. 2), the second power of 2 (i.e. 4), 2 3 (ie 8) 2 2 4 (ie 16) 2 2 5 (ie 32) 2 2 6 (ie 64) 2 2 7 (ie 128), Two seventh powers (i.e., 256) are associated with one another. Similarly, bit 0 to bit 7 of the register assigned to address 0B are associated with 2 to the eighth power (i.e. 512) to 2 to the 15th power (i.e. 32768), and the register assigned to address 0C The 2nd to the 16th powers (i.e., 65,536) to the 2nd power of 2 (i.e., 8388,608) are associated with the bit0 to the bit7 of. By using the storage area for these three bytes, it is possible to represent all values from 0 to 3599999 which are values that the clock counter 223g can take.

  When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the disconnection time storage area 352 d and the counter value storage area 352 e are both clocked in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. It is used to set the initial value of the counter 223g. The details will be described later in the description of the counter initial value setting process (S1231) executed in the start-up process, but the power is off based on the time information stored in the disconnection time storage area 352d. The period is identified, and based on the period of the power interruption state, it is identified how many times the period corresponds to the update of the counter value. Then, based on the specified counter value and the counter value stored in the counter value storage area 352e, the initial value of the clock counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is set.

  As described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, an initial value is set in the clock counter 223g in consideration of the period during which the power is disconnected. For example, among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall, one pachinko machine 10 is turned off, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an inspection of the entrance is performed. If it is necessary to turn on the RAM erase switch 122 only by turning on the power again, a counter value corresponding to the count value of the clock counter 223g of the gaming machine which has not been turned off. Can be set as the initial value. Therefore, it can suppress that the counter value of the time counter 223g shifts | deviates with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 which was not made into the interruption | blocking state. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the counter value of the time counter 223g can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player who is playing the game has an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  When all bits of addresses 0AH and 0BH in counter value storage area 352e are H, and 0th to 5th bits of address 0CH are H, 6th and 7th bits are L, it is converted to the counter value of clock counter 223g. Then, it corresponds to 4194303 and exceeds 3599999 which is the maximum value of the counter value. That is, all possible values of the clock counter 223g can be represented without using the upper 2 bits of the register assigned to the address 0CH. Therefore, other information may be stored in the upper 2 bits of the address 0CH. As a result, the register table of the register 352 can be efficiently used, so that the increase of the capacity of the register 352 can be suppressed and the cost increase can be suppressed.

Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment
Next, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In each of the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 among the startup processes, the same process as each process of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the start-up process in the third embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the counter initial value setting process (S1231) is replaced with the time acquisition process (S1211) of the start-up process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. Run.

  That is, in the start-up process in the third embodiment, after the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the counter initial value setting process is executed (S1231), and the interrupt permission is set (S1212) , Shift to main processing. This counter initial value setting process (S1231) is a process of setting an initial value to the counter value of the clock counter 223g, starting updating of the counter value starting from power on, and determining the counter value as the effect period Is a process that is performed to make it usable.

  Here, the details of the counter initial value setting process (S1231) will be described with reference to FIG. In the counter initial value setting process (S1231), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1521). When it is determined that the RAM erase switch is not on (that is, off) (S1521: No), the initial value 3599999 is set in the clock counter 223g of the RAM 223 (S1522), and the special effect flag is off. Then (S1523), the process ends and returns to the start-up process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is on (S1521: Yes), when the pachinko machine 10 is switched off last time from the disconnection time storage area 352d provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 The clocked time information of the device 262 is acquired (S1524). Next, information on the current time is acquired from the time register 352a of the time counting device 262, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state based on the current time and the time information at the time of power failure acquired in the process of S1524. The period which has been reached is calculated (S1525), and the counter value of the clock counter 223g stored when the pachinko machine 10 is switched off last time is acquired from the counter value storage area 352e (S1526). Then, assuming that the update of the counter value of the clock counter 223g continues without entering the power-off state from the period of the power-off state calculated in the process of S1525 and the counter value obtained in the process of S1526, A value corresponding to the current counter value of the clock counter 223g is calculated (S1527), and the calculated counter value is set as an initial value of the clock counter 223g (S1528). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the initial value of the set time counter 223g is a value corresponding to the special effect period, that is, whether the set initial value is within the range of 3000000 to 3599999 (S1529) If it is determined that it is not a special effect period (ie, it is a normal effect period) (S1529: No), the special effect flag is turned off (S1523), and the process ends to return to the start-up process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1529 that it is a special effect period (S1529: Yes), the special effect flag is turned on (S1530), and the process ends and returns to the start-up process.

  As described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the count counter 223g at the time of power interruption is set to the clock counter 223g, and the power is turned off. Since an initial value is set in consideration of the period of the state, for example, a plurality of board installed in the hall may be necessary because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection is performed. Of the pachinko machines 10, even if it is necessary to turn off one pachinko machine 10, turning the power on again while the RAM erase switch 122 is on will bring the machine into the power-off state. A counter value corresponding to the counter value of the time counter 223g of the gaming machine which has not been set can be set as the initial value. Therefore, it can suppress that the counter value of the time counter 223g shifts | deviates with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 which was not made into the interruption | blocking state. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the counter value of the time counter 223g can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player who is playing the game has an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Among the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, in each processing of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318 and S1319, S1301 of the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319 is executed. Then, in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when the processing of S1310 is completed, in the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. Instead, a counter update process (S1331) is performed. Furthermore, in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when the processing of S1316 is completed, in the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. Instead, the processes of S1332 and S1333 are performed.

  That is, in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, after the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S1310) is executed, the counter updating processing is executed (S1341), and the processing shifts to command determination processing (S1313). This counter update process (S1341) is a process for specifying the elapsed time since the power is turned on based on the counter value of the clock counter 223g, and determining the type of effect period. Further, in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1314: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing The middle flag is turned on together (S1316), and information indicating the current time updated by the time register 352a of the time counting device 262 is stored in the disconnection time storage area 352d (S1332), and the counter value of the time counter 223g is measured. The data is stored in the counter value storage area 352e of the device 262 (S1333). Thereafter, the power-off process is executed (S1318), the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1319), and the process is infinitely looped. The processes of S1332 and S1333 are information used to set the initial value of the counter value of the clock counter 223g when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, It is a process for storing in the register 352 of the clocking device 262 in order to hold it even during the power-off state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 60, the counter updating process (S1331) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing counter update processing (S1331). The counter update process is a process for updating the value of the clock counter 223g and determining the type of the current effect period based on the updated counter value.

  In this counter update process, it is checked whether the counter value of the clock counter 223g is 0 (S3701), and if the counter value is 0 (S3701: Yes), 3599999 which is the initial value is added to the clock counter 223g. The setting is made (S3703), and the process proceeds to the processing of S3704. On the other hand, if the counter value is other than 0 (S3701: No), the counter value of the clock counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S3702), and the process proceeds to the process of S3704.

  In the process of S3704, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the clock counter 223g updated by the process of S3702 or S3703 is a value indicating a special effect period, that is, whether it is within the range of 3000000 to 3599999. (S3704).

  When it is determined that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is a value indicating a special effect period (S3704: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S3709), and the special effect flag 223e is selected. Is determined to be on (S3709: Yes), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S3709: No), the special effect flag is turned on (S3710), and a special effect command is set (S3711). A command is set (S3712), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is not a value indicating a special effect period (that is, a value indicating a normal effect period) (S3704: No), the special effect flag 223e is on. If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S3705: No), this processing ends, and the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. Return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3705: Yes), the special effect flag is turned off (S3706), a normal effect command is set (S3707), and a rear image change command is set (S3705) S3708), the process ends, and the process returns to the main process of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Since whether it is a special effect period or a normal effect period is indicated depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, the variation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) ), When selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 is checked and it is a special effect period or not It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is on or not. Therefore, the process for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with the clock counter 223g whose counter value is updated each time the main processing is executed, and the counter value of the clock counter 223g. It is comprised so that the classification of the presentation period can be specified based on.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is switched off, information indicating the current time updated by the time register 352a of the time unit 262 and the counter value of the time counter 223g are sent to the register 352 of the time unit 262. It is configured to memorize. When the RAM erase switch 122 is on at the time of power on, the count value of the clock counter 223g is set based on the time information at the time of the power-off state and the count value of the clock counter 223g. If it is assumed that the update of the counter value of the clock counter 223g continues without entering the power-off state, a value corresponding to the counter value of 223g of the current clock counter is set. On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 122 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the counter value of the clock counter 223g is set to the initial value (ie, 3599999).

  As a result, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the initial value of 3599999 is set to the counter value of the clock counter 223g. In the hall where the game machine is installed, all the counter values of the clock counter 223g of each pachinko machine 10 are all initial only by turning on the power simultaneously to the plurality of game machines with the RAM erase switch 122 off. It is set to the value 3599999. Therefore, since the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the time counter 223g can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game performs in an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 Can be suppressed from feeling unnatural about what is being performed.

  Further, as described above, the clocking device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the clocking device power supply 263, which is a power supply different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, when the power-off state is entered, the time information at the time of the power-off state stored in the disconnection time storage area 352d or the counter value storage area 352e. It is possible to hold the stored counter value of the clock counter 223g at the time of the power interruption state.

  Then, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the initial value of 3599999 is not set to the counter value of the clock counter 223g, and the power is cut off. The counter value is set in consideration of the counter value of the time counter 223g and the period during which the power is disconnected, so that, for example, a failure of the pachinko machine 10 may require board replacement or an inspection of the entrance etc. Even if it is necessary to turn off one of the pachinko machines 10 among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall due to the reason described above, the power supply is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. The counter value corresponding to the counter value of the clock counter 223g of the gaming machine which has not been turned off is set as the initial value only by Rukoto can.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the counter value of the clock counter 223g deviates with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 which is not brought into the power-off state. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the counter value of the time counter 223g can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player who is playing the game has an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  In the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to one hour is initially set in the clock counter 223g, and the counter value is subtracted. However, the counter value is added up to the counter value of the corresponding time. You may comprise so that it may discriminate | determine. Also, a plurality of counters may be provided and configured by 8-bit counters, and may be configured to carry with each upper limit value. With this configuration, the number of bits of each counter can be reduced, and the counters can be easily configured. In addition, the counter may be configured by a counter IC or the like for clocking.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, time information (clocking information) is acquired from the clocking device 262, and the type of effect period is determined based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, the time information (clocking information) acquired from the clocking device 262 based on turning on the power is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the clocking device The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (clocking information) clocked by 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence relationship between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is the normal effect period or the special effect period, and is specified It is comprised so that the presentation according to the presentation period may be performed.

  In addition, when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at the time of turning on the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turning on time storage area 352b Are configured to be stored.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the type of the current presentation period is determined based on time information (clocking information) counted by the timing device 262 and a period information table in which the type of the presentation period is defined for each time. It is configured to determine.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that a period information table 222 c is provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the effect switching table 222 b. The point is that the period information storage area 223h is provided in place of the time information storage area 223f in the RAM 223, and the entry time storage area 352b is not provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. The partial process included in the start-up process (FIG. 26) and the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a ROM 222 and a RAM 223 as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Then, in the ROM 222, a period information table 222c is provided in place of the effect switching table 222b provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Further, in the RAM 223, a period information storage area 223h is provided in place of the time information storage area 223f provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The period information table 222c defines the type of effect period for each time, and is used to specify the type of current effect period with reference to time information (time information) counted by the clock 262. . The period information storage area 223h is an area for storing the type of effect period for each time defined in the period information table 222c, and the period of the ROM 222 in the table acquisition process (S1241) of the startup process (FIG. 64). The information defined in the information table 222c is read and stored.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 62, the details of the period information table 222c provided in the ROM 222 will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the period information table 222c. As shown in FIG. 62, in the period information table 222c, the type of effect period is defined in association with time. When the time indicates a normal effect period, a special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a display special effect flag 233k provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. Turns off. Then, based on these flags, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in the normal effect mode. On the other hand, when the time indicates a special effect period, a special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 and a special effect for display provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. The flag 233k is turned on. Then, based on these flags, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in a special effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in this embodiment, 60 minutes between 9:00 and 10:00 is a normal rendering period, and 10 minutes thereafter, and between 10:00 and 10:10 minutes. It is considered a special production period. Then, after 10 minutes which is considered as the special effect period has passed, it is again considered as the normal effect period, and the normal effect period continues for 50 minutes until 11:00. After that, the special rendering period of 10 minutes and the regular rendering period of 50 minutes are alternately repeated.

  As described above, except for 60 minutes from 9:00 to 10:00, if one game is played for one hour, it always switches to a different presentation period, so that the presentation period is changed and the player feels novelty to the player It can be done. Therefore, even if the player is playing the game for a long time, only the same effect occurs, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game. In addition, since the special rendering period of 10 minutes and the regular rendering period of 50 minutes are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone of the special rendering period and the time zone of the normal rendering period. . Therefore, it is possible to start the game aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect aspect suited to the player's taste is performed for each player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In FIG. 62, the correspondence between the time when the time is 12:00 or later and the type of the presentation period (period information table) is omitted, but it is actually 10 minutes special even after 12:00. The rendering period and the normal rendering period of 50 minutes are alternately repeated. The time of the period information table 222c may be set to at least the business closing time of the hall, and for example, the correspondence between 9:00 to 22:45 may be defined. Also, the correspondence may be set in the range from 9:00 to 9:00 the next day. In addition, the kind of presentation period is not necessarily restricted to two types of a normal presentation period and a special presentation period, You may provide three or more types of presentation periods in which the aspect of the presentation performed mutually differs.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The clocking device 262 of the present embodiment includes the register 352 as in the first embodiment, and includes the clocking register 352 a provided in the register 352 in the first embodiment, but the closing time storage area I do not have 352b. That is, in the present embodiment, the register 352 is used only for the purpose of clocking time, and is not used to hold information during the power-off state as in the first embodiment. In addition, about another structure, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

Regarding Control Process in Fourth Embodiment
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. The start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In each of the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 among the startup processes, the same process as each process of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the startup process in the third embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the table acquisition process (S1241) is executed instead of the time acquisition process (S1211) of the startup process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. Do.

  That is, in the start-up process in the fourth embodiment, after the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the table acquisition process is executed (S1241), the interrupt permission is set (S1212), the main Transfer to processing. This table acquisition process (S1241) is a process of acquiring the correspondence (period information table) between the time defined in the period information table 222c of the ROM 222 and the type of effect period, and is defined in the period information table 222c. This processing is performed to enable the correspondence relationship to be used to determine the effect period.

  Here, the details of the table acquisition process (S1241) will be described with reference to FIG. In the table acquisition process (S1241), the correspondence relationship (period information table) between the time specified in the period information table and the type of presentation period is read from the ROM 222 (S1531), and the read correspondence is applied to the period information storage area 223h. Store (1532). Thereafter, the current time information (clocking information) clocked by 262 of the clocking device is read out, and the type of the current presentation period is specified based on the time information and the correspondence stored in the period information storage area 223h. (S1533).

  In the process of S1534, it is determined whether or not the specific result in the process of S1533 is a special effect period (S1534). If it is determined that it is a special effect period (S1534: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned on. (S1535) This processing ends, and returns to the start-up processing. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1534, when it is determined that it is not a special rendering period (that is, it is a normal rendering period) (S1534: No), the special rendering flag 223e is turned off (S1536), and this processing is ended and started up. Return to processing.

  As described above, each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the correspondence defined in the period information table 222c is stored in the period information storage area 223h, so the correspondence between the time and the type of the presentation period ( The same period information table can be referred to each time regardless of whether or not the power is turned off. Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is turned off due to a substrate replacement being required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an inspection of the entrance being performed. If it is necessary to turn on the power again, the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off will use the time used to determine the type of effect period and the type of effect period Can be stored in the period information storage area 223 h of the RAM 223. Therefore, the types of effect periods determined based on the correspondence stored in the period information storage area 223h can also be made to match in each pachinko machine 10, so the player who is playing the game can not match with other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being executed in different effect modes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Among the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, in each processing of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318 and S1319, S1301 of the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319 is executed. Then, in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, when the processing of S1310 is completed, in the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. Instead, time confirmation processing (S1351) is executed.

  That is, in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the time confirmation processing (S1351) is executed after the execution of the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S1310), and the processing shifts to command determination processing (S1313). In this time confirmation process (S1351), the time information (clocking information) measured by the clocking device 262 and the correspondence (period information table) between the time and the effect type stored in the period information storage area of the RAM 223 It is a process for determining the type of the present effect period based on it.

  In the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, processing equivalent to the processing of S1317 in the main processing (FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is not performed. The processing of S1317 of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is provided with the time information at power on stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 in the register 352 of the clock 262 This processing is performed to store the time information in the power on time storage area 352b and to hold time data even in the power-off state, and the power-off state when the power is turned on again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is a process required to specify the elapsed time T based on the same time information as before. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the type of effect period is determined using the time information itself clocked by the time counting device 262 without using the elapsed time T. There is no need to hold it in the disconnected state, and there is no need to perform the processing corresponding to S1317.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the time confirmation processing (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The time confirmation process (S1351) is a process executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process of determining the type of effect period based on time information counted by the clock device.

  In this time confirmation process, the current time information clocked by the clock device 262 is read (S3801), and the correspondence between the read time information and the time stored in the period information storage area of the RAM 223 and the type of effect period ( The period information table is compared (S3802).

  Then, as a result of comparison, it is determined whether or not the current time indicates a special effect period (S3803), and when it is determined that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is a value indicating a special effect period (S3803) : Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on (S3808), and when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3808: Yes), this processing ends, and the audio lamp control is performed. The processing returns to the main processing of the device 113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S3808: No), the special effect flag is turned on (S3809), and a special effect command is set (S3810). A command is set (S3811), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  When it is determined in the process of S3803 that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is not a value indicating a special effect period (that is, a value indicating a normal effect period) (S3803: No), the special effect flag 223e is on. If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S3804: No), this processing ends, and the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. Return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3804: Yes), the special effect flag is turned off (S3805), a normal effect command is set (S3806), and a rear surface image change command is set (S3806) S3807), the process ends, and the process returns to the main process of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Since whether it is a special effect period or a normal effect period is indicated depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, the variation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) ), When selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 is checked and it is a special effect period or not It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is on or not. Therefore, the process for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the type of effect period can be identified based on the correspondence between the time stored in the period information storage area 223 h provided in the RAM 223 and the effect period. Configured.

  In addition, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory that is not backed up, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the information stored in the period information storage area 223h is cleared, but the non-volatile memory is Since the correspondence (period information table) between the time and the type of presentation period is defined in the period information table 222c of the ROM 222 which is composed of the period information specified in the period information table 222c when the power is turned on again. By storing the table in the period information storage area 223h, the type of effect period can be determined based on the same period information table as that before the power-off state.

  Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is turned off due to a substrate replacement being required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an inspection of the entrance being performed. If it is necessary to turn on the power again, the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off will use the time used to determine the type of effect period and the type of effect period Can be stored in the period information storage area 223 h of the RAM 223. Therefore, the types of effect periods determined based on the correspondence stored in the period information storage area 223h can also be made to match in each pachinko machine 10, so the player who is playing the game can not match with other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being executed in different effect modes.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the register 352 of the clocking device 262 stores time information at the time of power-on and time information at the time of transition to the power-off state, or provides a counter whose value is periodically updated. Not. That is, since the time counting device 262 is used only to obtain the present time, the capacity of the register 352 can be smaller than in the other embodiments. Therefore, cost reduction of the clocking device 262 can be achieved by the reduction of the storage capacity.

  In this embodiment, the period information table storage area 222c that defines the correspondence (period information table) between the time and the type of effect period is provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The correspondence between the time and the type of the rendering period may be defined in the ROM 202, or the correspondence between the time and the type of the rendering period may be stored in the register 352 of the clock device 262. In this case, in the table acquisition process (S1231) of the startup process (FIG. 64), the correspondence (period information table) between the time and the type of presentation period is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 or the register 352 of the timing device 262. It is good to control so that it may read out from and stored in the engine information storage area 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the correspondence between the time and the type of effect period is stored in the register 352 of the time counting device 262, the time information (time counting information) counted by the time counting device 262, the time stored in the register 352, and the effect period The timing device 262 may be configured to determine the current effect period based on the correspondence relationship (period information table) with the type of the object. In this case, the clocking device 262 is caused to perform the processing of S3801 to S3803 of the time confirmation processing (S1351) executed in the main processing (FIG. 66) of the audio lamp control device 113. It may be notified whether the type of the rendering period of is a special rendering period. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, effects are produced from the time information (clocking information) timed by the clocking device 262 and the correspondence (period information table) between the time stored in the period information storage area 223h and the type of effect period. Although the type of the period is determined, instead of this, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a counter means, and the value is periodically updated based on the power on. The elapsed time T may be determined based on the value.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223 f of the RAM 223 is switched to the insertion time storage area 352 b provided in the register 352 of the clock 262 when the power is cut off. If the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the on time storage area 352b is changed to the time when the power is turned on, in the RAM 223. It is configured to be stored in the time information storage area 223f.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the time information can be set by the player, and the third symbol display device 81 or the like is notified of a predetermined notification mode based on the set time. Is configured.

  The configurational difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is set by the player operating the operation input unit 23 in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. A setting time storage area 223i for storing the set time information is added, and when it is determined that the time information is set in the set time storage area 223i, a process of notifying a notification mode is added. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration in the first embodiment except that a set time storage area 223i is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 has an operation input unit. 23 are electrically connected. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  The set time storage area 223i is an area in which time information set by the player operating the operation input unit 23 is stored. When time information is stored in the set time storage area 223i, a notification mode is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the fact that the set time has come. The time information set in the set time storage area 223i is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In the initial setting, preset initial data is set. When this initial data is set, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to determine that time information is not set in the set time storage area 223i (FIG. 71). S4002: No).

  The operation input unit 23 is provided on the left side (not shown) of the frame button 22 so that the player can operate, and the input operation unit and its setting so that the player can set any time And a display unit capable of confirming the time of day when The input operation unit is provided with respective operation units (press buttons) so as to set hours, minutes, and seconds. When the player operates the operation unit, one of the information (hour, minute, second) corresponding to the operated operation unit is added (for example, if it is hour, it is one hour, if it is minute, it is one minute and second If there is, it is configured to be made every second. In addition, if it adds up to each upper limit, it will be set to 0 which is an initial value. The operation input unit 23 is provided with a determination operation unit, and when the player operates the determination operation unit, the time currently displayed on the display unit is set in the pachinko machine 10 as the set time. It is configured.

  Specifically, based on the determination operation unit being operated, the time information displayed on the display unit is stored in the set time storage area 223i in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. Then, when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines that the set time has been set, a display command for displaying the character "the set time has come!" Is set on the third symbol display device 81. Do.

  In the present embodiment, the operation input unit 23 is configured to set the time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an aspect (for example, a character, a symbol, a character, a background color, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 To be able to set the type of sound output from the audio output device 226, the lighting color and the lighting mode to be turned on by the lamp display device 227, etc. It may be configured.

  Further, although the present embodiment is configured to notify the notification mode when the time set by the player comes, the present invention is not limited thereto, but the variation pattern table of the special symbol set in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The type may be set to be switched, or the type (mode) of the variation pattern table may be designated and switched. By configuring in this way, when the time set by the player comes, the variation pattern of the special symbol is switched, so it is recognized that the set time has come without being noticed by other players while playing a game be able to. Also, the player can enjoy the predetermined variation pattern at any time.

  Here, the change pattern table to be switched is set so that the change time and the change type (such as out-of-range or out-of-reach) are not different from those instructed by the main controller 110, and the types of displayed characters, The background color, the sound effect, the notice effect, etc. are changed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the time information set in the set time storage area 223i is initialized. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The operation unit may be provided with an operation unit (a push button) corresponding to the initialization of time information. As a result, even if the player who has set the time information for performing the notification has stopped the game before the set time has come, the player who is to play the game next time is the input of the operation input unit 23 The time information can be initialized only by operating the operation unit.

  In addition, the storage area (set time storage area 223i) for storing the set time information is not provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, but provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Even in the state, the setting time information may be held without being initialized. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off against the intention of the player who has set the set time information, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an entrance inspection is performed. Even if the setting time information is closed, the setting time information can be suppressed from being initialized, so that the notification can be surely given to the player based on the setting time information set by the player.

Regarding Control Processing in Fifth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, notification time setting processing (S1311 in FIG. 29) is performed instead of the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311 in FIG. 29) of the main processing (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. S1361 of FIG. 70 and the notification process (S1362 of FIG. 71) are respectively added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a notification time setting process (S1361) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the notification time setting process (S1361).

  In the notification time setting process (S1361 in FIG. 70), first, it is determined whether the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 is operated (S3901). If it is determined that the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 is not operated (S3901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 is operated (S3901: Yes), the time information input to the operation input unit 23 is stored in the set time storage area 223i (S3902), This processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a notification process (S1362) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of this notification process (S1362).

  In the notification process (S1362), first, the time measurement data obtained by the time measurement device 262 is obtained from the time measurement register 352a, and the current time is read (S4001). It is determined whether time information is stored in the time information storage area 223i (S4002). If it is determined that the time information is not stored in the time information storage area 223i (S4002: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223i, that is, the time setting is executed by the player (S4002: Yes), the time read in S4001 and the set time are It is determined whether there is a match (S4003). If it is determined that it is the set time (S4003), a notification command is set (S4004), and then this process ends.

  When this notification command is output to the display control device 114, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 performs the setting in which the character "the set time has come!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the time set by the player can be set to the pachinko machine 10, and when the set time comes, a notification mode indicating that the set time has come to the player is notified. As a result, the player can remember a schedule such as calling at a set time or sending an e-mail, or the like, or can easily determine the elapsed time since the start of the game.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the processes of S2251 and S2252 are added to the command determination process (S2102 of FIG. 36) of the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a command determination process (S2102) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2102).

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 in the command determination process (S2102 in FIG. 72) that the normal rendering command is not received (S2206: No), it is determined whether the notification command is received (S2251). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2251: Yes), notification command processing is executed (S2252).

  Here, the notification command processing (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the notification command process (S2252).

  In the notification command process (S2252 in FIG. 73), first, the variable display data table corresponding to the character display of "the set time has come!" Is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S4101).

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

  Next, based on the display time corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101, the time data representing the display time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is 0 Is initialized to (S4104). Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, in the configuration according to the present embodiment, by displaying the notification mode on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time set by the player, the player is easily notified that the set time has come. be able to.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, a special variation pattern is selected, or a specific background (for example, a red background) is selected by the time set by the player. Thus, it is possible to naturally recognize that the set time is reached in the game presentation. Therefore, it can be recognized that the player has concentrated on the game and the set time has come.

  In addition, since the fluctuation pattern can be switched at any time, the effect of the game can be changed by the passage of the game time, and the setting according to the player becomes possible, and the player may get bored with the game early. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the information display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time set by the player, but the time information (clocking information) clocked by the clocking device 262 is always displayed. In addition to the time information, the notification mode may be displayed when the time set by the player is reached. As a result, since the player can grasp the current time even before the set time, it is possible for the player to recognize that the set time has come more reliably.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the first to fourth embodiments, the audio lamp control device 113 and the timing device 262 are electrically connected, and based on the information acquired from the timing device 262, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 performs a rendering period. Instead of this, the main control unit 110 and the clocking unit 262 are electrically connected, and based on the information acquired from the clocking unit 262, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 performs a rendering period. It may be configured to determine the type of. In this case, the main control device 110 may include information on the type of effect period in the command output to the audio lamp control device 113. The processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced by causing the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to determine the type of the effect period instead of the MPU of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the first embodiment and the third embodiment, a storage area is provided in the register 352 of the clocking device 262, and the information stored in the RAM 223 is stored when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state. Therefore, although the information is held even in the power-off state, instead, storage means capable of holding the stored information even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, It may be provided separately from the clocking device 262. A flash memory etc. correspond as a specific example of a memory | storage means. As a result, the storage area of the register 352 of the clocking device 262 can be reduced, so that the cost of the clocking device 262 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, when power is turned on, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223 f is provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 based on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off. It has been judged whether the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b is stored or the time information counted by the clock 262 is stored (S1501 of the time acquisition process (S1211), but this is replaced by Alternatively, the time information to be stored in the time information storage area 223 f may be determined based on the signals output from the hall computers connected to the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  Specifically, the hall computer is configured to be able to determine whether the power of each connected pachinko machine 10 is on or not, and the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 with all the pachinko machines 10 powered off. If it is determined that the power has been turned on (that is, if it is determined that the power has been turned on simultaneously for each of the pachinko machines 10), a signal indicating that the power is turned on simultaneously is outputted to each of the pachinko machines 10 for which the power is turned on. Configure to On the other hand, among the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer, only one pachinko machine 10 is powered off and the other pachinko machines 10 are determined to be powered on. If it is determined that the power is turned on to one pachinko machine 10 that is turned off, a signal indicating that the power is turned on independently is output to the one pachinko machine 10 that is turned on. Configure to Then, when the power is turned on, the time information to be stored in the time information storage area 223f may be determined according to the type of the signal output from the hall computer.

  Similarly, in the second embodiment, whether or not to initialize the elapsed time counter 352c is determined according to whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off (elapsed time counter initialization process ( Instead of this, it may be determined whether or not the elapsed time counter 352c should be initialized according to the type of the signal output from the hall computer. In the third embodiment, the counter value to be set in the clock counter 223g is determined according to whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off (S1521 of the counter initial value setting process (S1231) Alternatively, the counter value to be set in the clock counter 223g may be determined according to the type of signal output by the hall computer.

  As a result, the power can be turned on while holding the information stored in the RAM 203 before being turned off. Therefore, even if it was turned off in the state where the holding balls are left or was turned off during the high probability state of the special symbol, it was left based on the reactivation of the power supply. It is possible to suppress the disappearance of the holding ball and the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the disadvantage to the player.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined each one part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Below, in addition to the pachinko machine of this invention, the concept of the various inventions contained in embodiment mentioned above is shown.

<Feature group A> (The power-on time is stored when the power is turned on, and the storage of the power-on time is avoided if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on)
A game comprising: display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode, and clocking means capable of clocking even in a power-off state where power supply to the gaming machine is cut off In the machine, acquisition means capable of acquiring time information which is measured by the time counting means, time information storage means in which the time information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the time information storage means are powered on. Elapsed after the power is turned on based on time information storage control means controllable to obtain time information from the time means and stored by the acquisition means, and time information stored by the time information storage control means The effect mode to be displayed by the display control means is specified based on an elapsed time determination means for determining an elapsed time and the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determination means. The predetermined condition is determined by the effect switching determination means for determining whether to switch to the delivery mode, the condition determination means capable of determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on power on, and the condition determination means When it is determined that the timing information storage control means stores the time measurement information newly acquired by the acquisition means from the time measurement means, the time information storage control means prevents the time information storage control means from storing the time information. And a game machine A1 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A1, the clocking information clocked by the clocking unit is acquired by the acquiring unit, and the clocking information acquired by the acquiring unit is stored in the clocking information storage unit. The time information storage control means is controlled by the time information storage control means so that the time information is acquired from the timekeeping means by the acquisition means based on power-on and stored in the time information storage means, and the time information stored in the time information storage means Based on the elapsed time determination means, the elapsed time elapsed after the power is turned on is determined. Further, based on the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determining means, it is determined by the effect switching determining means whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to the specific mode, and based on power on It is judged by the condition judging means whether the condition of is satisfied. Here, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, the time measurement information newly acquired by the acquisition means by the time measurement means is stored in the time information storage means It is avoided by the avoiding means that the information is stored. Thus, if power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade without establishing predetermined conditions, the predetermined conditions are established even if one gaming machine is turned off. If the power supply is turned on again, overwriting of the time information on the time information storage means is avoided by the avoidance means, so that the timing at which the specific presentation mode is switched is shifted due to being switched off, etc. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine A1, the clocking unit is capable of storing predetermined memory information, and is provided with a power-off storage unit capable of holding the memory information even in the power-off state, and the timing information storage control unit is in the power-off state In this case, the game machine A2 is controlled to store the clocking information stored in the clocking information storage means in the interruption storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the clocking means, predetermined storage information is stored by the interruption storage means capable of holding the storage information even in the interruption state. Here, the timekeeping information storage means is controlled so as to store the timekeeping information stored in the timekeeping information storage means in the interruption memory means when it is in the power-off state. Thus, even if one game machine is turned off, the clocking information stored in the clocking information storage means is held by being stored in the power-off storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, the timing to switch to the specific effect mode is matched with the other gaming machines that were not put into the power-off state only by referring to the clocking information that is kept even during the power-off state. Can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted, so that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  The gaming machine A2 includes storage determination means capable of determining whether or not clocking information is stored in the power-off storage means, and the timing information storage control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The timekeeping information stored in the interruption storage means is stored in the timekeeping information storage means when it is determined by the means and when the storage judgment means determines that the timekeeping information is stored in the interruption memory means A game machine A3 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is judged by the memory judgment means whether or not the time measurement information is stored in the power interruption memory means. Then, when it is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when it is determined by the storage determining means that the timekeeping information is stored in the power interruption storage means, the timekeeping stored in the power interruption storage means Information is stored in the clock information storage means by the clock information storage control means. As a result, when power is turned on in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied despite the fact that time measurement information is not stored in the power failure storage means, time measurement information from the power failure storage means to the time information storage means Since it is possible to suppress that is stored, improper timekeeping information is stored in the timekeeping information storage means, and it is determined by the switching judgment means whether to switch to the specific mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted, so that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine A3, the timekeeping information storage control means is determined by the condition determining means that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on power-on, and the storage determination is made that no timekeeping information is stored in the power interruption storage means. A game machine A4 characterized in that, when judged by the means, the acquisition means controls to store the newly acquired timekeeping information in the timekeeping information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the acquiring unit newly acquires when it is judged by the condition judging unit that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and it is judged by the memory judging unit that the clocking information is not stored in the interruption storage unit. The clocking information storage control means controls the clocking information so as to be stored in the clocking information storage means. Thus, for example, when powering on a plurality of gaming machines whose timing information is not stored in the power-off storage means at the same time due to, for example, the initial state of shipment, the power source is Even if it has inserted, the time information newly acquired by the acquisition means can be stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the switching determination unit from determining whether or not inappropriate clocking information is stored in the clocking information storage unit, and whether to switch to a specific effect mode based on the inappropriate clocking information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress such a problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted for each gaming machine, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, whether the effect switching determination means switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode It is determined whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is performed in the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determining means. The display control means is provided with presentation mode notification means for notifying the information according to the presentation mode after switching to the display control means when it is determined to switch to the state in which the presentation is performed in a different presentation mode from the mode, and the display control means A game machine A5 characterized in that an effect is executed based on the notification by the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the normal effect mode and the specific effect mode are repeated, the novelty can be felt each time the effect mode is switched, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine A5, the display control means is in a state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode, or the specific effect, based on the information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notifying means. A game machine A6 comprising state information storage means for storing information indicating whether an effect is being executed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the effect mode may be specified based on the information stored in the information storage means, the display control means does not need to acquire time information to be measured by the time measuring means to determine the current effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

The gaming machine A6 includes control means for controlling the game, and the display control means
A display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed in response to a command received from the control means among a plurality of display modes, and provided for each of the plurality of display types, for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type A definition information storage unit for storing definition information that defines drawing information indicating necessary information for each screen, and the definition information corresponding to the display type specified by the display specification unit is selected from the definition information storage unit A game machine A7 comprising: selection means for selecting the prescribed information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means from the prescribed information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display control means does not determine all the image information necessary for drawing an image for performing rendering, and the display control means stores the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. Since it is sufficient to expand and transfer the image information in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means, and it is possible to reliably display an image without frame failure on the display means.

<Feature B group> (stored in free bit of Address other than RAM)
In a gaming machine having display means capable of displaying an effect aspect and display control means for causing the display aspect to display the effect aspect, clocking is possible even in a power-off state where power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted Means and time information updated by a part of bits of the first storage area made up of a plurality of bits of the predetermined storage area are stored every time the time information means updates the time measurement information; However, the first storage unit capable of storing the stored information, the second storage unit capable of storing the information stored in the first storage unit, and the first storage based on power-on to the second storage unit Storage control means for controlling to acquire and store timekeeping information stored in the area, and elapsed time elapsed after power on based on the timekeeping information stored in the second storage means by the storage control means Elapsed time format to determine Means for judging whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on the means and the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determining means; And a condition determination unit capable of determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the storage control unit is configured to use the timekeeping information stored in the second storage unit when the power is cut off. It controls so that the time-dependent information at the time of interruption is stored at least in the bit in which the timekeeping information of the first storage area is not stored, and it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition judging means. A game machine B1 for controlling to store timekeeping information based on the power interruption information stored in the first storage means in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, every time the clocking means capable of clocking even in the power-off state updates the clocking information, the predetermined memory area is updated with a part of bits of the first memory area constituted by a plurality of bits. Timekeeping information is stored by the first storage means. The information stored in the first storage means is held even in the power-off state. Then, the information stored in the first storage means is stored in the second storage means, and the second memory means acquires and stores the timekeeping information stored in the first storage area based on the power on. It is controlled by the storage control means. Further, based on the clocking information stored in the second storage unit by the storage control unit, it is determined by the presentation switching determination unit whether or not to switch the presentation mode displayed by the display control unit to a specific presentation mode. Based on the input, it is judged by the condition judging means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when the power is cut off, the storage control unit is configured to store the power-off time information according to the clocking information stored in the second storage unit in at least the bit in which the clocking information of the first storage area is not stored. Control is performed by the condition determination unit so that the time measurement information based on the interruption information stored in the first storage unit is stored in the second storage unit when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination unit. It is controlled by the storage control means. As a result, if power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines without establishing a predetermined condition, even if one gaming machine is switched off, it will be switched off. In the first storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power-off state, the power-off time information is stored, and the power-off time information is held even in the power-off state. Therefore, if the power is turned on again while the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store, in the second storage unit, the clocking information based on the power-off time information held even during the power-off state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the timing at which the effect mode is switched to the effect mode is shifted by being switched off. In addition, when the power interruption information is stored in the first storage unit, the first storage unit can be stored not only in the storage area where no information is stored but also in a part of the first storage area. Can be used efficiently, and information can be stored accurately even if the size of the information at the time of power interruption increases. Therefore, more detailed power-off time information can be stored in the first storage unit, so that the error in the timing of switching to the specific rendering mode can be reduced. As described above, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first storage means is comprised of a plurality of bits, and includes a power-off time information storage area capable of storing power-off time information in all the bits, and the storage control means is in the power-off state. And stores the power interruption time information according to the time measurement information stored in the second storage means into the power interruption time information storage area and the bit in which the time measurement information of the first storage area is not stored. Game machine B2 characterized in that it controls.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the first storage means, the power failure information is made up of a plurality of bits, and is stored in the power failure information storage area in which the power failure information can be stored in all the bits. Then, when it is in the power-off state, the power-off time information according to the clocking information stored in the second storage means is stored in the power-off time information storage area and the bit in which the clocking information of the first storage area is not stored. It is controlled by the storage control means to be stored. Thus, since the power-off information can be stored in the power-off information storage area and the bits not used for counting the first storage area, the first storage is compared to the case where the power-off information is stored in only one of them. The means can be used efficiently. Therefore, the data amount of the power interruption information which can be stored in the first storage means can be increased, so that the information can be accurately stored even if the size of the power interruption information becomes large, Detailed power-off time information can be stored in the first storage means. Therefore, the error of the timing of switching to the specific effect mode can be made smaller, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes storage determination means capable of determining whether or not the power interruption time information is stored in the first storage means, and the storage control means is configured to determine the predetermined condition by the condition determination means. The power failure time information stored in the first storage means when it is determined that the power failure time information is stored in the first storage means by the storage determination means. The game machine B3 is controlled to store timekeeping information based on the second memory means into the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is judged by the memory judgment means whether or not the power failure information is stored in the first memory means. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, and when it is determined that the power-off time information is stored in the first storage means by the storage determination means, the first storage means is stored It is controlled by the storage control means so that the timekeeping information based on the power interruption information is stored in the second storage means. Thereby, the second storage is performed based on the inappropriate information when the power is turned on in the state where the predetermined condition is satisfied although the power-off time information is not stored in the first storage means. Since it can be suppressed that timekeeping information is stored in the means, improper timekeeping information is stored in the timekeeping information storage means, and it is determined whether to switch to a specific mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. It can suppress being judged by the means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted, so that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine B3, the timekeeping information storage control means is determined by the condition determination means that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on power-on, and the power-off time information is not stored in the first storage means. A game machine B4 storing timekeeping information updated by a part of bits of the first storage area, when determined by the storage determination means, in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first storage area is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the storage determining means determines that the power-off time information is not stored in the first storage means. The clocking information updated by a part of the bits is stored in the second memory by the clocking information storage control unit. As a result, for example, when power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines whose power-off time information is not stored in the first storage means because of, for example, a shipping initial state, a state where a predetermined condition is falsely established. Even if the power supply is turned on at this time, it is possible to cause the second storage means to store updated timing information of a part of the first storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the switching determination unit from determining whether or not inappropriate timekeeping information is stored in the second storage unit, and whether to switch to a specific effect mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress such a problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted for each gaming machine, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B4, whether the effect switching determination means switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode It is determined whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is performed in the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determining means. The display control means is provided with presentation mode notification means for notifying the information according to the presentation mode after switching to the display control means when it is determined to switch to the state in which the presentation is performed in a different presentation mode from the mode, and the display control means A game machine B5 characterized by performing an effect based on the notification by the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the normal effect mode and the specific effect mode are repeated, the novelty can be felt each time the effect mode is switched, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine B5, the display control means is in a state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode based on the information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification means, or the specific effect A game machine B6 comprising state information storage means for storing information indicating whether an effect is being executed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the effect mode may be specified based on the information stored in the information storage means, the display control means does not need to acquire time information to be measured by the time measuring means to determine the current effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B6, a control means for controlling a game is provided, and the display control means is a display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means among a plurality of display modes; Provision information storage means for storing, for each of the plurality of display types, definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type; and the display specifying means Selecting means for selecting the predetermined information corresponding to the display type specified by the predetermined information storage means from the predetermined information storage means, the selection means corresponding to the predetermined information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means A game machine B7 selected from the specified information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display control means does not determine all the image information necessary for drawing an image for performing rendering, and the display control means stores the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. Since it is sufficient to expand and transfer the image information in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means, and it is possible to reliably display an image without frame failure on the display means.

<Feature C group> (A counter is provided on the RTC to count the elapsed time since power on)
A game comprising: display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode, and clocking means capable of clocking even in a power-off state where power supply to the gaming machine is cut off In the game machine, whether to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on an acquisition means capable of acquiring timekeeping information clocked by the timekeeping means and the timekeeping information acquired by the acquisition means The predetermined condition is satisfied by the effect switching judging means for judging whether or not, the condition judging means capable of judging whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the condition judging means A game machine C1 comprising: initialization means for initializing clocking information clocked by the clocking means when it is determined that there is.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the clocking information clocked by the clocking unit is acquired by the acquiring unit. Then, based on the timing information acquired by the acquisition means, the effect switching determination means determines whether to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode. Further, based on the power on, it is judged by the condition judging means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the condition determination means, the time measurement information measured by the time measurement means is initialized by the initialization means. Thus, if power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines in a game arcade with predetermined conditions established, time information kept by the clock means is simultaneously initialized by the initialization means. Since the clocking is newly started at the same timing, it is possible to match the clocking information clocked by the clocking means of each gaming machine. And, since it is judged based on the clocking information whether the switching to the specific rendering mode is made or not, if the clocking information of each gaming machine matches, the timing of switching to the specific rendering mode will be shifted. It can be suppressed. Therefore, in the plurality of gaming machines, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the player by mutually shifting the timing of switching to the specific effect mode.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the condition judging means judges that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, an initialization avoiding means for avoiding that the clocking information clocked by the clocking means is initialized by the initialization means A game machine C2 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is judged by the condition judging means that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the initialization of the clocking information kept by the clocking means is avoided by the initialization avoiding means. As a result, the power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade in a state where the predetermined conditions are satisfied, and after the timekeeping information of the timekeeping means of each gaming machine is timed, one game is completed. Even if the machine is turned off, if the power is turned on again when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the initialization of the clocking information by the initialization avoiding means is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the clocking information clocked by the clocking means deviates from the clocking information clocked by the clocking means of the gaming machine which has not been turned off, so that clocking information can be obtained in a plurality of gaming machines. By shifting the timings of switching to the specific effect mode based on the above, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the clock means includes a clock means for clocking time and an elapsed time clock means for clocking an elapsed time, and the initialization means is an elapsed time for clocking the elapsed time clock means. A game machine C3 characterized in that it is to be initialized.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, while grasping the current time, it is possible to grasp the elapsed time since the power is turned on.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C3, whether the effect switching determination means switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode It is determined whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is performed in the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determining means. The display control means is provided with presentation mode notification means for notifying the information according to the presentation mode after switching to the display control means when it is determined to switch to the state in which the presentation is performed in a different presentation mode from the mode, and the display control means The game machine C4 executes an effect based on a notification from the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the normal effect mode and the specific effect mode are repeated, the novelty can be felt each time the effect mode is switched, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine C4, the display control means is in a state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode based on the information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification means, or the specific effect A game machine C5 comprising state information storage means for storing information indicating whether an effect is being executed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the effect mode may be specified based on the information stored in the information storage means, the display control means does not need to acquire time information to be measured by the time measuring means to determine the current effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C5, a control means for controlling the game is provided, and the display control means is a display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means among a plurality of display modes; Provision information storage means for storing, for each of the plurality of display types, definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type; and the display specifying means Selecting means for selecting the predetermined information corresponding to the display type specified by the predetermined information storage means from the predetermined information storage means, the selection means corresponding to the predetermined information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means A game machine C6 selected from the specified information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display control means does not determine all the image information necessary for drawing an image for performing rendering, and the display control means stores the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. Since it is sufficient to expand and transfer the image information in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means, and it is possible to reliably display an image without frame failure on the display means.

<Feature D group> (determine the initial value of the counting means based on the period during which the power is turned off)
A game comprising: display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode, and clocking means capable of clocking even in a power-off state where power supply to the gaming machine is cut off In the game machine, whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on the count means for updating the count value every predetermined cycle based on power on and the count value of the count means The time information storage means capable of storing the time information acquired by the acquisition means, and the time information storage means capable of storing the time information acquired by the acquisition means; Timekeeping information storage control means that can be controlled so that time information is acquired from the timekeeping means by the acquisition means and stored in the storage means when the power is cut off; If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition judging means capable of judging whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not, the clocking information storage control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game comprising: initial value determination means for determining an initial value of the counting means based on timekeeping information stored in the timekeeping information storage means and timekeeping information newly acquired by the acquisition means Machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the count value is updated by the counting means every predetermined cycle based on the power-on, and based on the count value of the counting means, the effect mode displayed by the display control means is a specific effect mode. Whether or not to switch is determined by the effect switching determining means. Then, the clocking information clocked by the clocking unit is acquired by the acquiring unit, and the clocking information acquired by the acquiring unit is stored in the clocking information storage unit. The clock information storage control unit is controlled by the clock information storage control unit so that the clock information is acquired from the clock unit by the acquiring unit and stored in the clock information storage unit when the power is cut off. Here, based on power-on, it is judged by the condition judging means whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when it is judged that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the clock information storage The initial value of the counting means is determined by the initial value determination means according to the time measurement information stored in the time measurement information storage means by the control means and the time measurement information newly obtained by the acquisition means. As a result, if power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines in a game arcade without establishing predetermined conditions, clocking information is obtained even when one gaming machine is turned off. The period in the power-off state can be specified from the time-counting information stored in the storage means and the time-counting information newly acquired by the acquiring means, so that the counting means can be based on the period in the power-off state. The initial value of can be determined by the initial value determination means. Therefore, by determining a value corresponding to the count value updated by the count means of another gaming machine while in the power-off state as the initial value, it is possible to suppress a failure that the timing of switching to the specific rendering mode deviates. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine D1, when it is possible to store count information based on the count value of the count means and hold information stored in the power-off state, and in the case of the power-off state, And count information storage control means for storing count information based on the count value of the count means in the count information storage means, wherein the initial value determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means. When it is determined, the count information stored in the count information storage means by the count information storage control means, the time measurement information stored in the time information storage means by the time information storage control means, and the acquisition means The present invention is characterized in that the initial value of the counting means is determined based on newly acquired timekeeping information. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, count information based on the count value of the count means is stored by the count information storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power-off state. When the power is cut off, count information based on the count value of the count means is stored in the count information storage means by the count information storage control means. Here, when it is determined by the condition determination unit that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the count information stored in the count information storage unit by the count information storage control unit, and the clock information storage control The initial value determination means determines the initial value of the counting means based on the time information stored in the time information storage means by the means and the time information newly acquired by the acquisition means. Thus, the initial value of the counting means can be determined in consideration of the count value of the counting means immediately before the disconnection state, so the count value before the disconnection state and the period during the disconnection state can be determined. Thus, the value corresponding to the count value of the counting means of the gaming machine which has not been turned off can be accurately determined as the initial value of the counting means by the initial value determining means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted between the gaming machine in the power-off state and the gaming machine in the non-power-off state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine D2, the count value of the counting means can take a value between a specific minimum value and a specific maximum value, and the value is subtracted at each update, and the value is reduced When the value is updated after reaching the specific minimum value, the value is updated to the specific maximum value, and the initial value determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determining means. The gaming machine D3 characterized in that, when it is determined that the predetermined maximum value is not determined, it is determined as the initial value of the counting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the count value of the counting means can take a value between a specific minimum value and a specific maximum value. Then, the value is decremented by the counting means each time updating, and if the value is updated after the value reaches a specific minimum value, the value is updated by the counting means to a specific maximum value. Here, when it is judged by the condition judging means that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the specific maximum value is decided by the initial value deciding means as the initial value of the counting means. As a result, the count value of the counting means is updated at a predetermined cycle in a predetermined range from a specific maximum value to a specific minimum value, so that the count value becomes a specific minimum value after becoming a specific maximum value. The time taken by can be made constant. Therefore, when the power is turned on again in the state where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the initial value determining means can easily determine the initial value of the count value based on the period of the power-off state. Further, since the time required for the count value of the counting means to make a round is constant, the time for switching to a specific effect mode can also be constant. Therefore, since the player can easily guess the time zone to be the specific effect mode, the player can play the game aiming at the time of the specific effect mode, or on the contrary, in the normal effect mode other than the specific effect. It is possible to play games by aiming for time. As described above, there is an effect that the player having various preferences can easily recognize the time zone in which the effect mode matches the preferences.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D3, in the state where the effect is determined to be executed in the specific effect mode, is the effect switching determination means switched to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode? It is determined whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is performed in the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determining means. The display control means is provided with presentation mode notification means for notifying the information according to the presentation mode after switching to the display control means, when it is determined to switch to the state in which the presentation is performed in a different presentation mode from the mode The game machine D4 executes an effect based on the notification by the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the normal effect mode and the specific effect mode are repeated, the novelty can be felt each time the effect mode is switched, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine D4, the display control means is in a state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode based on the information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification means, or the specific effect A game machine D5 comprising state information storage means for storing information indicating whether an effect is being executed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the effect mode may be specified based on the information stored in the information storage means, the display control means does not need to acquire time information to be measured by the time measuring means to determine the current effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine D5 includes control means for performing control related to a game, and the display control means specifies a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means among a plurality of display modes; Provision information storage means for storing, for each of the plurality of display types, definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type; and the display specifying means Selecting means for selecting the predetermined information corresponding to the display type specified by the predetermined information storage means from the predetermined information storage means, the selection means corresponding to the predetermined information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means A game machine D6 selected from the specified information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display control means does not determine all the image information necessary for drawing an image for performing rendering, and the display control means stores the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. Since it is sufficient to expand and transfer the image information in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means, and it is possible to reliably display an image without frame failure on the display means.

<Feature E group> (store time to switch to specific effects in storage means)
In the gaming machine having display means capable of displaying the effect mode and display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode, clocking is possible even in a power-off state where the power supply to the game machine is cut off The display control means displays the clock based on the clocking means having a storage area capable of storing predetermined setting information, the clocking information clocked by the clocking means, and the predetermined setting information stored in the memory area Effect switching determining means for determining whether or not to switch the effect mode to a specific effect mode, condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the condition determining means The time setting information for measuring the predetermined setting information and the time measuring means whether or not the effect mode is to be switched to the specific effect mode based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Game machine characterized by comprising a-on determining means for determining from E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the predetermined setting information is stored by the storage area of the clock means capable of clocking even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Then, based on the clocking information clocked by the clocking means and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area, it is determined whether the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to a specific effect mode or not It is judged by means. Further, based on the power on, it is judged by the condition judging means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, based on the fact that the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined setting information and the time information to be measured by the time measurement means determine whether or not to switch the effect mode to a specific effect mode. Is determined by the insertion time determination means. As a result, even if the power of one of the plurality of gaming machines is turned off, the clocking means having the storage area operates even after the power supply is cut off, so the predetermined time stored in the storage area is maintained. The setting information can be held even after the power supply is cut off. Therefore, based on the predetermined setting information, it is determined by the effect switching determination means whether or not to switch to a specific effect mode, so that the timing at which the specific effect mode is switched is other than that the power supply is not cut off It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the game machine is shifted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine E1, the time counting means includes a specific mode notifying means for notifying the display control means when it is determined by the effect switching determining means to switch the effect mode to a specific effect mode, and the specific mode A game machine E2, characterized in that the display control means switches the effect mode to be displayed on the display means to a specific effect mode based on the notification by the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined by the effect switching determination means that the effect mode is switched to the specific effect mode in the clock means, the specific mode notification means is notified to the display control means. Then, based on the notification by the specific mode notification means, the effect mode to be displayed on the display means is switched to the specific effect mode by the display control means. Thereby, since the display control means may switch the effect mode to the specific effect mode based on the notification from the specific mode notification means, in order to determine whether or not to switch to the specific effect mode, clocking of the clock means There is no need to obtain information frequently and check the elapsed time. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E2, the effect switching determination means displays the effect mode displayed by the display control means on the basis of clocking information clocked by the clocking means and predetermined setting information stored in the storage area. It is determined whether or not to switch to the normal effect mode, and the time counting means notifies the display control means when it is determined by the effect switching determining means to switch the effect mode to the normal effect mode. And a display control means for switching the effect mode to be displayed on the display means to the normal effect mode based on the notification by the normal mode notification means. .

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect switching determination means determines whether or not the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to the normal effect mode based on the time information counted by the time measuring means and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area It is judged by The time counting means is notified to the display control means by the normal mode notifying means when it is determined by the effect switching determining means that the effect mode is to be switched to the normal effect mode. Here, based on the notification by the normal mode notification means, the effect mode to be displayed on the display means is switched to the normal effect mode by the display control means. Thereby, since the display control means may switch the effect mode to the normal effect mode based on the notification from the normal mode notification means, in order to determine whether to switch to the normal effect mode, the clocking means measures time There is no need to obtain information frequently and check the elapsed time. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced.

<Feature F group> (Informs at the set time of the player)
A gaming machine comprising: display means capable of displaying an effect mode; display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode; and clocking means capable of clocking even when power supply to the game machine is cut off, Whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on setting means by which the player can set setting information, time information which the time measuring means counts, and setting information set in the setting means A condition judging unit for judging, and a notification mode selecting unit for selecting a notification mode to be notified by the notification unit based on the setting information when it is judged by the condition judging unit that the predetermined condition is satisfied; A game machine F1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F1, setting information is set by the setting means. Then, based on the clocking information clocked by the clocking unit and the setting information set in the setting unit, the condition judging unit judges whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, the notification mode selected by the notification means is selected by the notification mode selection means based on the setting information. As a result, the player who sets the setting information in the setting means can recognize that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the notification by the notification means, so that the predetermined condition is satisfied so as to concentrate on the game. It is possible to suppress continuing the game without noticing. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the game machine F1, the display control means causes the display means to display an effect mode based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect mode selected by the notification mode selection means is displayed on the display means by the display control means. As a result, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the presentation mode based on the notification mode is displayed on the display means which is a portion where the player pays attention in the game when the predetermined condition is established, so the player does not notice the notification. There is an effect that it can control continuing a game. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the gaming machine F1 or F2 comprises erasing means capable of erasing the setting information set by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the setting information set by the setting means is erased by the erasing means. Thereby, the setting information can be erased according to the erasing means when another player sets by the setting means but quits the game before the predetermined condition based on the setting information is satisfied. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress that a player who plays a game with the gaming machine next is notified by the notification means when a predetermined condition based on setting information set by the previous player is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the fact that the notification by the notification means interferes with the game.

  The gaming machines F1 to F3 are provided with control means for controlling the game, and the display control means is provided for each of the plurality of notification modes, and is a drawing showing information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the notification modes. It corresponds to a notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit from among the predetermined information storage unit that stores the predetermined information that defines the information for each screen, and the plurality of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage unit. A game machine F4 comprising selection means for selecting regulation information, wherein the display control means executes a notification mode based on the regulation information selected by the selection means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display control means does not determine all the image information necessary for drawing an image for performing rendering, and the display control means stores the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. Since it is sufficient to expand and transfer the image information in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means, and it is possible to reliably display an image without frame failure on the display means.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, and F1 to F4, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, and F1 to F4. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The game machine Z3 to be characterized. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 Display control device (display control means)
223f Time information storage area (second storage means)
262 Timekeeping device (timekeeping means)
352 register (first storage means)
352a Timekeeping register (timekeeping means, first storage area)
352b Entry time storage area (information storage area at power off)
S1501 Condition judgment means S1503 Memory judgment means S1505 Storage control means S1602 Elapsed time judgment means S1604 Part of effect switching judgment means S2204, S2206 Part of effect switching judgment means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine acquires information updated when power is supplied, and by executing a game based on the information, different game characteristics are realized, and the player enjoys the game Are trying to improve the

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-19803

However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine is increased by providing a storage means for backup in order to reduce problems by initializing various gaming data when the power is turned off. .

The present invention has been made to solve the like problems described above, it shall be the object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in cost.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this purpose, has a display unit capable of displaying a display mode, a display control means for displaying the display mode on the display means, a predetermined power a first power supply means capable of supplying its a different second power supply means and the first power supply means, also in the power power interruption state supply is blocked by the second power supply means, using said first power supply means and updatable updating means information about time, a first memory means capable retained in the update information updated by the update means, said power interruption state by the electric power supplied from said first power supply means, said A second storage unit capable of storing the update information stored in the first storage unit when power is supplied from a second power supply unit; and supply of power by the second power supply unit is started said first memory hand based on Based the update information stored in the a-executable storage control means controls to store in the second storage means, the update information stored in the second storage means by the storage control means, the second The display mode displayed by the display control means is specified based on the elapsed time judging means for judging the elapsed time elapsed after the power supply by the power supply means and the elapsed time judged by the elapsed time judging means. and a display switching unit that can switch the display mode, the storage control unit, when the pre-Symbol power interruption state, a the update information stored in the second storage means, the next time the the power interruption when updating information for use in the determination of the elapsed time after the power supply of the second power supply means, a control to store into the first storage means, the power by the second power supply means Control to cause the second storage means to store the update information updated by the update means when the supply is started and the power-on-time update information is not stored in the first storage means And is feasible .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect of the present invention , the gaming machine has display means capable of displaying a display mode, and display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode; Even when the power supply by the second power supply unit is interrupted by the second power supply unit different from the first power supply unit and the second power supply unit, the information about the elapsed time is transmitted using the first power supply unit. Updateable update means, first storage means capable of holding update information updated by the update means even in the power-off state by the power supplied from the first power supply means, power from the second power supply means A second storage unit capable of storing the update information stored in the first storage unit when the second supply unit is supplied, and the first storage unit based on the start of the supply of power by the second power supply unit; The above stored in the storage means Storage control means capable of executing control to store new information in the second storage means; and power of the second power source means based on the update information stored in the second storage means by the storage control means The display mode displayed by the display control means can be switched to a specific display mode based on an elapsed time determination means for determining an elapsed time elapsed after supply and the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determination means A display switching unit, and the storage control unit is the update information stored in the second storage unit in the power-off state, and the storage control unit is the update information stored in the next power supply unit Control for storing the power-down update information to be used for determining the elapsed time after supply in the first storage unit, and a case where supply of power by the second power supply unit is started Control for causing the second storage unit to store the update information updated by the update unit when the power-on update information is not stored in the first storage unit; is there. Therefore, there is an effect that the increase in cost can be suppressed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ROM, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed the production | presentation switching table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a time-measurement apparatus. It is the model which showed the register table of the time-measurement apparatus typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the time acquisition process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selective processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control procedure. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is error command processing executed by the MPU of the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the demonstration display processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the time-measurement apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the register table of the time-measurement apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time counter initialization process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the time-measurement apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the register table of the time-measurement apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the counter initial value setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the counter update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the period information table of ROM in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the time-measurement apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the table acquisition process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time confirmation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first) when the ball passes the second entrance 67. 2) The lottery will be held. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit of the special symbol is performed, and when it is determined that the big symbol is a special symbol, the big hit type The determination of is also made. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) The opening is repeated five times (five rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As a jackpot type of special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the end of the special game state as a added value after the jackpot end, on the game according to these jackpot types The player's value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player strikes a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a, so many balls enter the first ball entrance 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second ball entrance 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It will be in the state. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 , And is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, there are provided two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

  The "big hit A" is the probability variation jackpot that the maximum round number shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the 15 round big hit, and the "big hit B" is the maximum round number after the 15 round jackpot. The special symbol low probability state and the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) is the time-speaking jackpot that becomes the time-shortened state of the normal symbol.

  Here, "high probability state of special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol thereafter is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, while the probability fluctuation of the so-called special symbol (during the variation of the special symbol) In other words, it is the state of the game which is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, "low probability state of special symbol" refers to the time when the probability change is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change. Also, among the "special symbol low probability state" and the time saving state (time and day middle) of the normal symbol, while the jackpot probability is a normal state, only the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is up with the jackpot probability unchanged It refers to a gaming state in which a ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64. In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time when the electric character (not shown) attached to the first ball entry port 64 opens, or a single hit The number of times the motorized role opens may be changed.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) The special symbol (the first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. In the case of "big hit A" to shift to a high probability state (probability state) of the special symbol after the big hit end, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to "high probability pattern") with odd numbers are aligned In the case of "big hit B" to shift to a low probability state of special symbols after the end, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to "low probability symbols") to which even numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out and the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed as the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67 is being executed by a lighting state, or As a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, the normal symbol (the second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. FIG. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, as in the first ball entrance 64, and is three times or less, or five times or more (For example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (5 round jackpot) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided. Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  FIG. 7A is a view schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, as a part of the fixed value data described above, the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the second random number table 202c. , Fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the random number counter C1 (not shown) is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 7B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 7 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern is set for each display pattern. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 24) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first ball entrance The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 7A) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1 If the value matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first per random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol and high probability when special symbol is more likely to be a big hit than low probability (special symbol special It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbol and the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. Here, whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 is a random number for which the special symbol is a big hit is defined by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A). The first random number table 202a includes a first random number table 202a (not shown) for low probability of a special symbol and a first random number table 202a (not shown) for a high probability of special symbol. And the first random number table 202a is used depending on whether the special symbol has a low probability or a special symbol having a high probability.

  In the first random number table 202a for low probability time of the special symbol, “7, 307, 582” is stored as three random number values that become the jackpots of the special symbol. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 900, and the total number of jackpots is 3, so the probability of being a special symbol is "1/300".

  On the other hand, in the first random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols, as the 30 random number values that become the big wins of the special symbols, “28, 58, 85, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 900, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/30".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability time, and the random noise for the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values with numerical values, random numbers that will be the jackpots of each are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, the jackpot type is defined for each value of the first collision type counter C2 by the first collision type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Specifically, in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is "0 to 49" is "jackpot A". In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “back and forth reach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 24) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is done.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202 d includes, for example, “disengagement (for a long time)”, “disengagement (for a short time)”, “disappearance normal reach”, “disappearance super reach”, “disappearance” as a distraction fluctuation pattern. A variety of special reach is defined, and a variation pattern of jackpot A and jackpot B common, a variety of "shared normal reach", a variety of "shared super reach", and a variety of "shared special reach", is defined as the variation pattern for jackpot A. “Special reach” types are defined, and “common normal reach” types, “shared super reach types”, and “shared special reach types” are defined as the variation patterns for hit and off. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 7 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the second hit random number counter C4 If the value matches the value of the random number which is the second set by the random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table 202c is a second per random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 7 (c)) for low probability of a normal symbol (during normal condition of a normal symbol) and its low probability It is divided into two types with the second per random number table 202c (refer to Fig. 7 (c)) for high probability when it is likely to hit the normal symbol (period in which the symbol is in the short time state), The number of winning random numbers is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the second random number table 202c for low probability of the normal symbol stores 24 random values corresponding to the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28 It is ". As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be hit is 24, so the probability that the symbol is normally hit is “1/10”.

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 obtains a normal symbol. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, in the second random number table 202c for the high probability of the normal symbol, 200 random number values corresponding to the normal symbol are stored, and the range is “5 to 204”. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 selects the normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64. It should be noted that a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit, but it is open. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 6, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 24), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 is a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a middle time It has a counter 203e and a probability change flag 203f.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The respective values of the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as the drawing of the special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big hit lottery of the original special symbol In addition to the above, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3. Thus, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning combination From now on, it is described that the prediction is made by prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information to save the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. From this, various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  Then, various information predicted is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the prize information command, and the voice lamp control device 113 wins the prize information using various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command. It stores in the information storage area 223a.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance port 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, if you shift data from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area will be empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserved areas will be the same as in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Are added (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 18).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 18 and S405 in FIG. 20). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry hole 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

  When the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not (S703 in FIG. 21: No).

  The time saving counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol if the value of the time counter 203 e is zero. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203e is set to zero, and the main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and the counter 203e is set to 100 each time it is determined that "big hit B". Ru. That is, when the "big hit B" is reached, 100 is newly set in the time saving medium counter 203e regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203e.

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time-sinking counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for a normal symbol based on a random symbol table for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol per symbol table for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 20).

  The probability change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203f is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state, and if the probability variation flag 203f is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The certain variation flag 203f is turned on when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for special symbols and is determined to be "big hit A", and is turned off when determined to be "big hit B" (S213 in FIG. 17). , S214).

  When a big hit lottery of special symbols is performed, it is referred to whether or not the probability change flag 203f is on, and if it is on, the big hit lottery of special symbols based on the first hit type selection table 202b for high probability time If the probability change flag 203f is off, a jackpot lottery of special symbols is performed based on the first hit type selection table 202b for low probability.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208 Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) Control of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, a frame button 22, a clocking unit 262, etc. are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a (not shown) and an effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 8).

  The variation pattern table 222a is a table used to determine the aspect of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, according to the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the rough fluctuation patterns such as "outside normal reach", "shared normal reach", and "shared special reach". The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used to determine the detailed aspect of the fluctuation pattern based on the aspect of the rough fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command, and the rough of the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command For each aspect, an aspect of a plurality of detailed variation patterns that can be selected is defined.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time is measured (measured) by the clocking device 262. Then, based on the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262, the mode of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the rendering mode such as the background image is changed to a special rendering mode at predetermined time intervals. Control is to be done. For this reason, the fluctuation pattern table 222a defines a fluctuation pattern of a special effect mode and a fluctuation pattern of a normal effect mode. Then, when it is determined that the effect is executed in the special effect mode based on the time information (time information) of the time counting device 262, one of the fluctuation patterns of the special effect mode in the fluctuation pattern table 222a. The variation pattern aspect of is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rendering is not performed in a special rendering mode (that is, the rendering is performed in a normal rendering mode) based on time information (clocking information) of the time counting device 262, the fluctuation pattern table One variation pattern aspect is selected from the variation patterns of the normal presentation aspect 222a.

  That is, in the fluctuation pattern table 222a, a plurality of detailed aspects are defined for each of the rough aspects of the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, and in the plurality of detailed aspects An aspect of the variation pattern of the normal presentation aspect and an aspect of the variation pattern of the special presentation aspect are defined.

  Next, the effect switching table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether the rendering mode is the normal rendering mode or the special rendering mode, based on the time information (clocking information) of the timing device 262. Then, the effect switching table 222b determines whether the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in the normal effect mode or in the special effect mode. Used for

  The determination of the effect mode is performed in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 of FIG. 28) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the determination value of the effect switching table 222b shown in FIG. The effect mode is specified according to the elapsed time T (see S1602 in FIG. 29) determined based on the time information (clock information) of the time counting device 262 (see S1603 in FIG. 29).

  FIG. 8 is a view schematically showing an example of the effect switching table 222b stored in the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, in the effect switching table 222b, the type of the effect period is defined in association with the value of the elapsed time T after power on to the gaming machine. If the value of the elapsed time T indicates a normal effect period, a special effect flag 223 e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later and a work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are provided. The display special effect flag 233k is turned off. Then, based on these flags, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in the normal effect mode. On the other hand, when the value of the elapsed time T indicates the special effect period, the special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are provided. The display special effect flag 233k is turned on. Then, based on these flags, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in a special effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, in the case of 60 minutes or less after power on, it is a normal effect period, and 10 minutes after the elapse of 60 minutes is a special effect period. Then, after 10 minutes which is considered as the special effect period has passed, it is considered as the normal effect period again, and the normal effect period continues for 50 minutes. After that, a special rendering period of 10 minutes and a regular rendering period of 50 minutes are alternately repeated.

  As described above, except for 60 minutes immediately after the power is turned on, switching to a different presentation period is required if one hour of game is played, so that it is possible to make the player feel new by switching the presentation period. Therefore, even if the player is playing the game for a long time, only the same effect occurs, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game. In addition, since the special rendering period of 10 minutes and the regular rendering period of 50 minutes are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone of the special rendering period and the time zone of the normal rendering period. . Therefore, it is possible to start the game aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect aspect suited to the player's taste is performed for each player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, although the correspondence of the elapsed time T in the elapsed time T after 180 minutes and a presentation period is abbreviate | omitted and described in FIG. 8, the special presentation period of 10 minutes and 50 minutes are also actually 180 minutes or later. It is set so that the normal rendering period of and are alternately repeated. The range of the elapsed time T in the effect switching table 222b may be set to at least the opening hours of the hall at a minimum. For example, the elapsed time T is less than 1440 minutes (24 hours). The correspondence with the period may be set, or the correspondence for several days may be set. Further, the type of effect period is not necessarily limited to two types of the normal effect period and the special effect period, and three or more effect periods having different modes of effect to be performed may be provided.

  Furthermore, although a table in which the type of effect period is defined for each value of elapsed time T is defined in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a table corresponding to all the values of T. For example, one kind of range of the value of the elapsed time T, which is a normal effect period, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T, which is a special effect period, are defined one by one. When out of the range, a predetermined value may be added to the specified range of the elapsed time T. As a specific example, for example, the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is a normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the values of the elapsed time T which is a special effect period is 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes When the value of the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, it is defined as 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the normal rendering period and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the special rendering period It is also possible to add 60 minutes 00 seconds to each and control to reset the type of effect period in the range of the value of the elapsed time T from 60 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds.

  More specifically, in the effect switching table 222b, the range of the value of the elapsed time T in the normal effect period is 0:00 to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T in the special effect period is Only the information of 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes 00 seconds is defined. Then, based on power on, the information defined in the effect switching table 222b is copied to a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the copied information. Then, if the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, which is the maximum value of the value of the elapsed time T defined in the copied information, 60 minutes 00 seconds are added to the copied information to make a new one. Update to information. That is, the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is a normal effect period is 60 minutes 00 seconds to 110 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is a special effect period is 110 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds It is updated to the information that there is. Thereafter, every 60 minutes and 00 seconds, 60 minutes 00 seconds are added to the copied information to control to update to new information, and based on the updated information and the elapsed time T, the rendering period Determine the type of

  In this case, the amount of data in the effect switching table 222b is reduced, so the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Therefore, the price of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a special effect flag 223e, and a time information storage area 223f And at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1407 in FIG. 31). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the number-of-held-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2701 in FIG. 32), and is turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 30). The fluctuation start flag 223c is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1707 in FIG. 30). The stop type selection flag 223 d is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The special effect flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the current effect period is a special effect period. This special effect flag 223e is a part of the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the effect switching table 222b in the elapsed time check process (see S1311 of FIG. 28) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 It is turned on when it is determined to switch to (see S1610 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, it is turned off when it is determined that the special effect period is switched to the normal effect period based on the effect switching table 222b (see S1606 in FIG. 29). The special effect flag 223e is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the special effect flag 223e is turned on, a special effect command is output (see S1611 in FIG. 29). Therefore, based on receiving the special effect command, the display control device 114 or the like performs round effect or demonstration effect. Etc. are executed in a special presentation mode. Then, the special effect mode continues until the display control device 114 or the like receives a normal effect command (see S1607 in FIG. 29) output based on the turning off of the special effect flag 223e.

  Depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, it is indicated whether it is a special effect period or a normal effect period, so the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). In the reference), when selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, check the clocking information (time information) of the clocking device 262 and determine whether it is a special effect period It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is ON or not. Therefore, the process for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the hall, if a plurality of pachinko machines 10 according to the present embodiment are arranged side by side (the islands are configured) and installed, the effect mode of the effects performed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 forming the island can be Accordingly, it is possible to simultaneously switch to different presentation modes (is linked to the island). By interlocking with the island, depending on the timing of playing a game, the display effects (the display mode of the background, the third symbol, the character giving a notice, etc.), the sound effects (sound effects, back music, etc.) etc. Since it is executed, each player can start playing the game at the timing when the effect of the effect mode matching the user's preference is performed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of effect period is switched according to the elapsed time, but island interlocking may be performed according to the day of the week, the date, the season, or the like.

  The time information storage area 223 f is an area in which time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 is stored when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In the time acquisition process (see S1211 of FIG. 26) of the start-up process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221, current time information (clocking information) acquired by the time counting device 262 is stored. The stored time information is used to calculate the elapsed time T from the power on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 28) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, and in the normal effect period. It is used to determine whether it is a special effect period or a special effect period (see S1604 in FIG. 29). Since the content stored in the RAM 223 is not backed up, when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the clock information stored in the time information storage area 223f is cleared.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of effect period is determined based on the time information acquired from the clocking device 262 and stored in the time information storage area 223f during the start-up process. In the machine 10, if the timing at which the start-up process is performed is matched, the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f of each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f is matched, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the elapsed time The timing to switch from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on T and the timing to switch from the special effect period to the normal effect period can be matched based on the elapsed time T. Thereby, the person concerned of a hole can unify the presentation period of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 simultaneously. Therefore, with some pachinko machines 10 being in a normal rendering period and the other pachinko machines 10 being in a special rendering period, the player who is playing the game is executed in a rendering mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity with In addition, as a method of turning on power simultaneously to a plurality of pachinko machines 10, for example, an island constituted by a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is provided, and an external power supply which can turn on power in island units is used. It should be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the time counting device 262, and the time information acquired during the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process (rather than switching the type of presentation period according to the time zone) The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in S1311), and the type of presentation period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the clock devices 262 of the pachinko machines 10 deviate from each other due to aged deterioration or the like, the mutually deviated time information is not directly used for determining the type of presentation period, but elapsed Since the relative value of time T can be converted and used for determination of the type of effect period, the influence of the shift can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing to switch from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period based on the elapsed time T and the timing to switch from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the presentation period of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, a part of pachinko machine 10 becomes a normal presentation period, and the other pachinko machine 10 becomes a special presentation period, and the player who is playing a game is It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed in a different effect mode from the other pachinko machine 10.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) properly.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  The clocking device 262 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and is configured to have a real time clock (RTC) capable of clocking the current time. The electrical configuration of this clocking device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the clocking device 262. As shown in FIG. The clocking device 262 has an input / output port 350, a device control unit 351, and a register 352. In addition, a clocking device power supply 263 is connected to the clocking device 262. The timepiece device power supply 263 is a power supply dedicated to the timepiece device 262 different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the timepiece device 262 even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. A button type battery is used for the power supply 263 for this clocking device.

  An input / output port 350 and a register 352 are connected to the device control unit 351 of the clocking device 262. The input / output port 350 is communicably connected to the audio lamp controller 113. The device control unit 351 uses (controls) the register 352 to perform various controls such as clocking of the current time and execution of an alarm at a set time. Here, as shown in FIG. 10, the register 352 has a register table composed of a plurality of registers. The register table includes a clocking register 352a and a closing time storage area 352b. That is, as shown in FIG. 9, the register 352 of the clocking device 262 is provided with at least a clocking register 352a and a closing time storage area 352b.

  The clock register 352a is a register for clocking the current time, and the register value is updated every second. Further, the insertion time storage area 352 b is a storage area to which various information such as clock information can be written, and to which stored information can be overwritten. The timing information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is written to the power on time storage area 352b in the main processing (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 when there is information on occurrence of power failure. This is an area (see S1317 in FIG. 28).

  Here, the register table of the register 352 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 schematically shows a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the register 352 can hold up to 8 bits of data at each of 15 addresses from 0H to EH in the register table. Among these addresses, addresses 0H to 6H correspond to the time counting register 352a, and each address represents second, minute, hour, day, day, month, year.

  The details of the clock register 352b will be described by taking an address 0H representing a second as an example. The bit 7 of the address 0H is a non-rewritable bit fixed at L, and the current number of seconds is expressed using bit 0 to bit 6. The symbol “o” attached to bit 7 in FIG. 10 is a symbol indicating that the bit is a non-rewritable bit, and indicates the same meaning in other addresses. Also, bit 0 to bit 6 correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds and 40 seconds respectively, and the number of seconds at the current time depends on whether each bit is H or L It will be shown.

  For example, when the number of seconds at the current time is 5 seconds, both bit 0 representing 1 second and bit 2 representing 4 seconds will be H, and all bits 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be L. This makes it possible to express that 5 seconds, which is the sum of seconds represented by H bits, is the number of seconds of the current time. When the number of seconds at the current time is 29 seconds, bit 0 representing 1 second, bit 3 representing 8 seconds, and bit 5 representing 20 seconds are H, and all bits 1, 2, 4, 6 are L Become. This makes it possible to express that 29 seconds, which is the sum of seconds represented by H bits, is the number of seconds at the current time.

  The address 1H representing a minute, the address 2H representing a time, the address 4H representing a day, the address 5H representing a month, and the address 6H representing a year also correspond to the bit being H similarly to the address 0H representing a second The current time is represented by the sum of the numbers. As for the address 6H representing the year, the last two digits of the year are indicated, and the first two digits of the year are fixed at 20. That is, the address 6H representing a year can represent only between 2000 and 2099.

  Also, for address 3H representing a day of the week, bit 0 to bit 6 correspond to Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, respectively, and one bit is H and the other bits are L and Can be used to express a specific day of the week. For example, if the present is Wednesday, bit 3 becomes H and bit 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 becomes L.

  Addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the insertion time storage area 352b, and can store data of up to 3 bytes. A register for storing seconds (corresponding to address 7H), a register for storing minutes (corresponding to address 8H), and a register for storing time (corresponding to address 9H) are respectively assigned to the entry time storage area 352b. ing. Further, the correspondence between each bit and the second, minute, and time is similar to that of the addresses 0H to 2H.

  That is, bit 0 to bit 6 of the register storing seconds correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively, and bit 0 to bit 6 of the register storing minutes are , Corresponding to 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes, 8 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes and 40 minutes, respectively, bit 0 to bit 5 of the register for storing time are respectively 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 3 It corresponds to 10 hours and 20 hours. In FIG. 10, the symbol “●” is attached to all bits, but it is a symbol indicating that the information can be rewritten and read, and this is a symbol at other addresses. Also have the same meaning.

  The correspondence between each bit of the time counting register 352a and the insertion time storage area 352b and the number of seconds, a fraction, and the like is not limited to the form of this embodiment. For example, the value of each bit may be associated with a power of two. Further, in the present embodiment, although the insertion time storage area 352b is configured by 3 bytes, the number of bytes may be reduced by storing only the values of time and minute as information of stored time, for example. Also, the number of bytes may be increased by adding a register capable of storing milliseconds in addition to seconds, minutes and hours. Furthermore, storage means such as a RAM may be provided outside the time counting device 262 instead of storing the time measurement information in the input time storage area 352b. In this case, the power supply to the storage unit may be performed by the power supply 263 for the clocking device, or a separate power supply dedicated to the storage unit may be provided.

  The addresses AH to CH are registers used to output an alarm signal at a set time, and the addresses DH and EH are registers capable of outputting an interrupt signal at set cycles. When the alarm function or the interrupt function is not used, the addresses AH to EH can be used as the insertion time storage area 352b instead of the addresses 7H to 9H. In this case, since 3 bytes of the addresses 7H to 9H can be reduced, the number of registers can be reduced, so that the cost of the clocking device 262 can be reduced.

  Although only the registers assigned to the addresses 0H to EH are shown in FIG. 10, in addition to these, registers to which addresses other than 0H to EH are assigned are provided, for example, an alarm function or the like. A register or the like is provided to change settings of the interrupt function and the like.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 34) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 36B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 33).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 12, while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the power is turned on, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of power on as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 12 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on, as shown in Fig. 12 (c), The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 12 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when “big hit of the special symbol”, and in FIG. 12 (c) when “out of special symbol”. The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a regular effect data table storage area 233b1, a special effect data table storage area 233b2, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, and drawing It has at least a list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and a display special effect flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The normal data table storage area 233b1 and the special data table storage area 233b2 each display the third effect over time as to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 in the normal effect period and the special effect period, respectively. Transfer data of the display data table describing the display contents to be displayed on the symbol display device 81 and the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one of the effects displayed by the display data table It is an area in which information and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects , And display data tables corresponding to demonstration effects are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now. The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and the special effect data table storage area 233b2, one display data table corresponding to the round effect and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 14 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 14).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 33). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 45 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 35B), When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (FIG. 35B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 35 (b) (see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 41 to 44) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 of FIG. 45A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 45B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later (see FIG. 15) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. In step S2103), the pointer updating process (see S3005 in FIG. 41) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 15, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 41). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The update of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3509 in FIG. 46). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3510 in FIG. 46). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 35B) is performed, the process is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 47).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The display special effect flag 233k is a flag indicating whether or not the current effect period is a special effect period. The display special effect flag 233k determines that the clocking data acquired from the clocking device 262 in the process of S1604 in the process of checking the elapsed time (S1311 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is a special effect period. When the special effect flag 223e is set to ON, the special effect command is set to be output to the display control device 113 (S1610 to S1611). Then, the MPU 231 of the display control device 113 sets the display special effect flag 233k to ON based on the reception of the special effect command, whereby the current state of the display control device 113 is the special effect period. It can be determined that the

  The display special effect flag 233k is set to OFF when the normal effect command indicating that the state is the normal effect period is received (S2207 in FIG. 36), and the state is the normal effect period. Are determined by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. In the initial setting performed when the power is turned on, the display special effect flag 233k is configured to be set to off as an initial state.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 899, 99, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S104), and then, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passes along with the passage of the ball at the second entrance port 67 A process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211). If the lottery result this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is the jackpot A (S213).

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot A (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON (S213). If it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot A (ie, it is the jackpot B) (S212: No), the probability change flag 203f is set to OFF, and 100 is set in the hour reduction counter 223e (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and the present process is ended. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the processing of S215, when the jackpot control processing (S1004) of the main processing (see FIG. 25) is executed, the processing branches to S1101: Yes and the third symbol display In the device 81, a jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving / mid-time counter 203e (S217), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). The special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be done.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired To do (S301).

  Next, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit random number table 202a, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S302). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value stored in the first random number table 202a. As mentioned above, the random number value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol at the time of the low probability of the special symbol is three of "7, 307, 582" stored in the first random number table 202a for the time of low probability The random number value that becomes the big hit of the special symbol at the high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238 , 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 656, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ". .

  Further, it can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203f whether the present is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, if the probability change flag 203f is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203f is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the process of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability change flag 203f, and when these values match, special processing is performed. It determines that it is a jackpot of the symbol.

  When it is determined in the process of S302 that the jackpot of the special symbol is determined (S302: Yes), the display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301. (S303). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit of the special symbol with three types (big hit Of A and jackpot B), it is determined which is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot A (probable variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "49 to 99", the jackpot B It is determined that (time and junior high hit) (see FIG. 7 (b)).

  In the process of S303, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S304). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S304, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappear normal reach", "disappear super reach", and "disappear special reach" As the variation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B common, various "shared normal reach", various "shared super reach", various "shared special reach" are defined, and as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot A, various "special reach" Are defined, and as the variation pattern of hit / out-of-common use, various common common reach, various common super reach, and common special reach are specified.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S302: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a back and forth reach, a reach other than the back and forth, or a complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S306). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S304, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the process of S304 or the process of S306 is finished, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S304 or the process of S306 is set (S307). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S305 is set (S308). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S308 is finished, the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) to determine whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a start winning. It is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the process of S407, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, lottery success or failure (whether jackpot or not) in the special symbol, its stop type (in the case of jackpot, jackpot type), and its The variation pattern is predicted (S407). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406, and the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A) It is determined by comparing one by one with the (hit value). As mentioned above, the random number value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol at the time of the low probability of the special symbol is three of "7, 307, 582" stored in the first random number table 202a for the time of low probability The random number value that becomes the big hit of the special symbol at the high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238 , 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 656, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ". .

  Further, it can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203f whether the present is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, if the probability change flag 203f is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203f is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the process of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability change flag 203f, and when these values match, special processing is performed. It determines that it is a jackpot of the symbol.

  And, when it is determined that it is a big hit of the special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol big hit type table, Of the two types of special symbol jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B), it is determined which jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot A (probable variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "49 to 99" It is determined that (time and junior high hit) (see FIG. 8A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out, the front and back out of reach reach as a stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406. It is determined whether it is a reach other than the back and forth deviation or the complete outlier. Here, if the probability change flag 203f is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability time, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", it is determined to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", it is determined to be reach other than out of order If it is "98, 99", it is determined that the back and forth reach is reached. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203f is off, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, to determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", it is determined to be reach other than out of order If it is "98, 99", it is determined that the back and forth reach is reached.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is a lottery result predicted from the fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 7A) stored in the ROM 202, and a predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit) It is selected according to the type). In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as a fluctuation pattern for deviation, various kinds of "disappearing (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various, "disappearing special reach" "Various is specified as the variation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B common, various" shared normal reach ", various" shared super reach ", various" shared special reach ", as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot A" special " Various types of reach are defined, and various types of shared normal reach, various types of shared super reach, and various types of shared special reach are defined as the variation patterns for hit and off. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  If the process of S407 predicts the lottery success or failure in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the jackpot type), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery success or failure, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The winning information information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prize information command, it extracts yes or no, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and stores the information in the prize information storage area 223a as prize information. , It is determined whether or not the display of the continuous advance notice effect starts.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-span-medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The hour-time counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-shortening counter 203f is 1 or more, the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first entrance 64 is opened. This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the first ball entrance 64 is restrained from entering the ball in the jackpot of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 7 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / middle counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 7 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S 613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time thereof are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the first entry ball opening The opening period of the motorized accessory attached to 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / storing counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball inlet 64 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is performed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electrically driven combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized combination is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electrically operated combination is performed when the motorized combination opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry hole 67, and when the ball passes. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry hole 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained (S702) . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed the second entrance ball opening 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second entrance ball opening 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 23, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. Note that, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 24, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) or the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, it transmits the number-of-rounds command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25) to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S1005). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the motorized part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (refer to FIG. 18), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S303 or the processing of S305 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 18). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 20), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83 Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 20), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( Turn on).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until it reaches the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can start from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1102). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1102, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1102: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1103, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1105). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls are present. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1106, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1107), and this processing ends. Do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1106: No), this processing is ended.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1318 (see FIG. 28) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of step S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 28), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing in S1318. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1318 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1318 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-down process of S1318 is performed (see S1316 in FIG. 28). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is performed, the process of S1208 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). Then, time acquisition processing is executed (S1211), interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110. The details of the time acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1208 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1204 to S1206 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process is transferred to S1210, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The process is executed (S1211), interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process shifts to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the time acquisition process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. This time acquisition process (S1211) is a process for storing the time when the power is turned on. The time information acquired by this process is used to determine the elapsed time since the power is turned on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 28) performed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later. Be

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the time acquisition process (S1211). When the time acquisition process (S1211) is executed, it is first determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is turned on (S1501), and if it is not turned on (S1501: No) Information on the current time is acquired from the time measurement register 352a of 262 (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S1501: Yes), the time information stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the clock 262 is read (S1502), the closing time storage area 352b. Whether time information is stored is determined (S1503). As a result, when it is determined that the time information is not stored (S1503: No), the information of the current time is acquired from the clock register 352a of the clock device 262 (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time information is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timer 262 (S1503: Yes), the process of S1504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1505.

  In the process of S1505, the time information read out in the process of S1502 or S1504 is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 (S1505), and the process is ended.

  As described above, since time information for determining the type of effect period is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 by this processing, the timing at which the start-up processing is performed in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the hole If it combines, the timing by which time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f of each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f is matched, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 28) can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10 The timing for switching from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period can be made based on the elapsed time T. Thereby, the person concerned of a hole can unify the presentation period of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the hall all at once. Therefore, with some pachinko machines 10 being in a normal rendering period and the other pachinko machines 10 being in a special rendering period, the player who is playing the game is executed in a rendering mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity with

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the clocking device 262, and the type of the presentation period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired during the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in the inside, and the type of the presentation period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the clock devices 262 of the pachinko machines 10 deviate from each other due to aged deterioration or the like, the mutually deviated time information is not directly used for determining the type of presentation period, but elapsed Since the relative value of time T can be converted and used for determination of the type of effect period, the influence of the shift can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing to switch from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period based on the elapsed time T and the timing to switch from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the presentation period of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, a part of pachinko machine 10 becomes a normal presentation period, and the other pachinko machine 10 becomes a special presentation period, and the player who is playing a game is It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed in a different effect mode from the other pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a state where the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, in the off state), time information when the power is turned on is The time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM is stored in the time information storage area 223f when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off in the main processing (FIG. 28) described later. It is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262. Since the clocking device 262 operates based on power supply from the clocking device power supply 263 even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, the pachinko machine 10 stores the time information stored in the closing time storage area 352b. It is held even in the power-off state. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on when the power is turned on, the power is stored in the on time storage area 352b of the timer 262 instead of the current time information. The time information held even during the power-off state is read out and stored in the time information storage area 223 f of the RAM 223.

  As a result, for example, when one of the pachinko machines 10 needs to be turned off during operation due to failure of the pachinko machine 10, substrate replacement is required, or an on-site inspection is performed. Also, it is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 by time acquisition processing when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off last time, only by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. The time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262 can be stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 again when the power-off state is set. Therefore, if power is simultaneously turned on to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in a hole with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, then one pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Also, only by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on again, the time information when the power is turned on all at once can be stored in the time information storage area 223f. Before and after power-on, the elapsed time T can be determined based on the same time information. Therefore, based on the same elapsed time T as other gaming machines, it is possible to match the timing for switching from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period and the timing for switching from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period. It is possible to suppress the timing at which the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the production mode from being shifted, and the player who is playing the game feels uncomfortable for the production being performed in a different production mode from the other pachinko machines 10 Can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is detected in the time acquisition process (see S1211 in FIG. 26) that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, it is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262. Although the time information is read (see S1502) and controlled to be stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 (see S1505), the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, a switch means used exclusively for time acquisition processing different from the RAM erase switch 122 is provided, and in the time acquisition process (S1211), the input time storage area of the clock 262 when the switch means is on. The time information stored in 352 b may be read out.

  Thus, the time information stored in the insertion time storage area 352b of the time counting device 262 is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 while holding the information stored in the RAM 203 before being put into the power-off state. Can. Therefore, even if it was turned off in the state where the holding balls are left or was turned off during the high probability state of the special symbol, it was left based on the reactivation of the power supply. It is possible to suppress the disappearance of the holding ball and the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the disadvantage to the player.

  Further, instead of using the switch means such as the RAM erase switch 122 etc., the time information stored in the input time storage area 352 b of the time counting device 262 is used when the time measured by the time counting device 262 is a predetermined time zone. It may be configured to read out. In this case, the business hours of the hall may be set as, for example, 10:00 to 22:45 as the predetermined time zone.

  As a result, when the employee of the hall turns on the power to the pachinko machine 10 that has been turned off during business hours without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 due to a mistake, the power is restored again. The time when the charging is performed is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 233, and it is possible to suppress that the elapsed time T deviates from the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off. Therefore, the timing at which the rendering period is switched can be reliably synchronized between the pachinko machine 10 in the power-off state and the pachinko machine 10 in the non-power-off state during business hours. In addition, since the time information stored in the time information storage area 233f is selected according to the time information (clocking information) clocked by the clocking device 262, the employee of the hall performs a special operation when the power is turned on. There is no need to do this, and it is possible to reduce the labor of the hall employees.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time information read out in the process of S1502 or S1504 is configured to be stored in the time information storage area 223f, but instead, it is provided in the register 352. It may be configured to be stored in unused bits of the register table (see FIG. 10). The bits not used here refer to, for example, the bit 6 of the address BH and the bits 4 to 7 of the address EH, and among the bits to which the symbol “●” is attached in FIG. Point to the bit. As described above, these bits are bits capable of rewriting and reading information, and even if data are rewritten, they are bits that do not affect the operation of the clocking device 262 at all. As a result, the register table provided in the register 352 can be efficiently used, and therefore, the address allocated to the insertion time storage area 352b can be reduced.

  Specifically, for example, information representing a second is stored in bit 0 to bit 6 of address 7H, and information representing a minute is stored in bit 7 of address 7H and bit 0 to bit 5 of address 8H. And information representing time may be stored in bit 4 to bit 7 of the address EH. As a result, the address 9H not used for storing data can be reduced, and the capacity of the register 352 can be reduced, so that the price of the clocking device 262 can be reduced.

  In the register table provided in the register 352 of the present embodiment, in FIG. 10, the bit attached with the sign of “o” is a non-rewritable bit of L fixed, but the sign of these “o” The bit attached with may be configured to be rewritable, and the time information read out in the process of S1502 or the process of S1504 may be stored also in the bit with the sign of “o”. As a result, since the register table can be used more efficiently than storing time information only in the bit to which the symbol "●" is added, the capacity of the register 352 can be further reduced. It is possible to further reduce the price of 262.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1301 has been executed (S1301), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the process of S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, it is the process concerning S1302 to S1311 mainly regarding display (rendering) to determine whether 1 msec has elapsed, while it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S1312 and the variable display setting processing of S1313 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1312 is performed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process shifts to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, an elapsed time confirmation process is executed (S1311). In the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), the current effect period is determined based on time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262. The details of the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process of performing a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 is executed (S1312). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1313 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1314). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1314 (S1314: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1316), and stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 The power-on time information is written to the power-on time storage area 352b of the timer 262 (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1314 (S1314: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1315) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1315: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1315: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, an elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this elapsed time confirmation process (S1311). In this elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), it is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 The present presentation period is determined on the basis of.

  In the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), first, the information of the current time is read from the time register 352a of the time counting device 262 (S1601), and the read current time and the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 The elapsed time T from the power on is calculated based on (S1602). Here, as a method of calculating the elapsed time T, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223 f of the RAM 223 may be subtracted from the information indicating the current time read from the time register 352 a of the time counting device 262. For example, the information of the current time read from the clock register 352a indicates AM 10:15 (that is, all bits of address 0H are L, bits 0, 2, 4 of address 1H are H, bits 1, 3, 5-7 are Information that indicates that the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f is AM 9:00 (that is, all of the addresses 0H and 1H are L, and bit 4 of the address 2H is H and bits 0 to 3 to 5 are L) When the bit of L is L, bit 0, 3 of address 2H is H, and bits 1, 2, 4 to 7 is L), the elapsed time T takes the difference between 10:15 and 9:00, and 75 minutes It is calculated.

  Then, based on the calculated elapsed time T and the effect switching table (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 222, the current effect period is specified (S1603), and it is determined whether the current effect period is a special effect period. (S1604).

  As a result of the process of S1604, when it is determined that it is not a special effect period (ie, it is a normal effect period) (S1604: No), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S1605). If the special effect flag 223e is on (S1605: Yes), this means that the special effect period has been switched to the normal effect period in the current main processing, so the special effect flag is turned off (S1606). Next, a normal effect command for setting the effect mode of the round effect or demonstration effect executed by the display control device 114 to the normal effect mode is set (S1607), and the back surface displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A rear surface image change command for changing the image to the rear surface image of the normal mode is set (S1608), and this processing ends. Further, in the process of S1605, when the special effect flag is off (S1605: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a special effect period as a result of the process of S1604 (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S1609). If the special effect flag 223e is on (S1609: Yes), this process ends. If the special effect flag 223e is off, it means that the normal effect period has been switched to the special effect period in the main processing of this time, so the special effect flag is turned on (S1610). Next, a special effect command for setting the effect mode of the round effect or demonstration effect executed by the display control device 114 as a special effect mode is set (S1611), and the back surface displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A rear surface image change command for changing the image to the rear surface image of the normal mode is set (S1612), and this processing ends.

  Since whether it is a special effect period or a normal effect period is indicated depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, the variation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) ), When selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 is checked and it is a special effect period or not It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is on or not. Therefore, the process for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, switching of the special effect flag 223e is performed when the effect period switches, but the special effect flag 223e may be updated each time an elapsed time check process is performed. Further, the setting of the normal effect command (S1607) or the setting of the special effect command (S1611) may be performed each time the elapsed time confirmation process is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether it has been done (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), fluctuation pattern selection processing for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern is performed (S1402), and the processing returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type selected here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114. Details of the variation pattern selection process (S1402) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). When the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The number of times of suspension N of the variable display in is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1407). Further, in the process of S1407, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1407 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination is performed. Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1407 is the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. In addition, if the process of S1408 is performed, the holding ball number command for a display for notifying the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b to the display control apparatus 114 will be set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1407, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1406: No), it is next determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1408). Then, when a winning information command is received (S1408: Yes), various information (pass or fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1409). When the process of S1409 is finished, next, the winning information (approval, stop type, fluctuation pattern) extracted in the process of S1409 is the first of the vacant areas (first to fourth areas) of the winning information storage area 223a. Store in the area (S1410),
Return to main processing.

  In the process of S1408, when the prize information command has not been received (S1408: No), it is next determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1411). Then, when the round number command is received (S1411: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1412), and the display round number command according to the extracted round number is set ( S1413), the process ends. The round number command for display set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1411 (S1411: No), it is determined whether or not other commands have been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1419) Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the variation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection process (S1402). This variation pattern selection process (S1402) is executed in the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the third symbol This is processing for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern to be executed in the display device 81.

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2701), and then it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S2702).

  Then, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223 e is on, the fluctuation pattern type for the special effect period is extracted from the fluctuation pattern types based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (S 2703) ), End this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2702: No), the normal effect period of the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 The variation pattern type for the target is extracted (S2704), and this processing ends.

  Based on the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S2703 or S2704, the variation pattern effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, since the variation pattern types for different effect periods are selected depending on whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on, various effects can be executed, and the player can enjoy the game It can be improved. Therefore, even if the player is playing the game for a long time, only the same effect occurs, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game. In addition, as described above, since the special rendering period of 10 minutes and the regular rendering period of 50 minutes are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone of the special rendering period and the time zone of the normal rendering period can do. Therefore, it is possible to start the game aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect aspect suited to the player's taste is performed for each player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1313). This variation display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation presentation, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1313), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S1701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S1402) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) In step S1703), the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1706: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, in the process of S1709, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710 . In the process of S1710, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710). The variable display setting process is ended. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 47. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is enabled to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs and fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 33) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S1801) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 34, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S1901. After repeating the process including the process of S1902 a plurality of times, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simplified image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 45A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3302 of FIG. 45A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. As a result, during this time, a simple command is made so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B). A determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and a simplified display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 35B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When the display variation pattern command is received through the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, the interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S1806, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 35 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 35B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, ie If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is performed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2104). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2104), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 12 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2109) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2203).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a special effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if it is determined that there is a special effect command (S2204: Yes), the display special effect flag 233k is selected. When it is turned on (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201. If the special effect flag is turned on, the round number display data table corresponding to the round effect of the special effect mode is selected in the round number command process (S2213) described later. Further, in a demonstration display process (S3017) described later, a demonstration display data table corresponding to a demonstration effect of a special effect mode is selected. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, round effects and demonstration effects are performed in a special effect mode.

  By switching the effect which has been executed in the normal effect mode to the special effect mode, the player can be made to feel the novelty, so it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous, It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  If it is determined in the process of S2304 that there is no special effect command (S2204: No), it is then determined whether there is a normal effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If it is determined that there is a normal effect command (S2206: Yes), the display special effect flag 233k is turned off (S2207), and the process returns to S2201. If the special effect flag is turned off, the round number display data table corresponding to the round effect of the normal effect mode is selected in the round number command process (S2213) described later. Further, in a demonstration display process (S3017) to be described later, a demonstration display data table corresponding to a demonstration effect of a normal effect mode is selected. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, round effects and demonstration effects are performed in a normal effect mode.

  By switching the effect that has been executed in the special effect mode to the normal effect mode, the player can be made to feel novelty, so it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous, It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the special effect command output from the audio lamp control device 113, the effect mode of the effect to be executed in the third symbol display device is a special effect mode and a normal effect mode. It has been decided which presentation mode to execute, but in place of this, it is possible to read out the time information of the clocking device 262 by the display control device 114, and based on the read time, the special effect period or the normal effect It may be determined whether it is a period.

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is no normal rendering command, then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2208: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2209) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing (S2209). The variation pattern command processing (S2209) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2304), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81 while extracting the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2302. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2208 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2208: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2210), If there is a display variation type command (S2210: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2211), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S2401), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It sets to OFF (S2403), and returns to command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2104), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the process of S2402.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2210 that there is no display stop type command (S2210: No), it is then determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), If there is a display round number command (S2212: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, it is checked whether or not the display special effect flag 233k is on (S2601), and if the display special effect flag 233k is on (S2601: Yes), it corresponds to the received command. The selected round number display data table is selected from the special effect data table storage area 233b2 and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2602). On the other hand, if the display special effect flag 233k is off (S2601: No), the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is selected from the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S2602).

  Since the number-of-rounds display data table selected from any of the normal effect data table 233b1 and the special effect data table 233b2 is set in the display data table 233d depending on whether the special effect flag is on or off, the effect is periodically generated. The aspect can be switched. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel novelty every time the effect mode is switched, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2604).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2602 or S2603, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2605) (S2606). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S2607), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2212 that there is no display round number command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2214), If there is an image change command (S2214: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2215) will be described. FIG. 40 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S2801) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A and B), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on. The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. .

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is displayed according to the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2802 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2214 that there is no rear surface image change command (S2214: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2216), and the error command exists. For example (S2216: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (b). FIG. 40 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2901). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S 2902), and the error command is The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2216 that there is no error command (S2216: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2218), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

  In the process of S2201 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes ), The processing of S2202 to S2218 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2218 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2108) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 12, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 37) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 38), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other commands are those Perform processing to discard without executing processing corresponding to.

  Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 37) executed in this case, in the process of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d. In addition, since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. In the process of S2302, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and a process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 41, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S3001: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing (S2104), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Decide various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3003 (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is the End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3205), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), the present process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3202: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In task processing (S2104), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3006 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and for each sprite It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and it is the timing to perform the finalized display, so first, the finalized display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3015) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect to be performed. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is not on but off in the process of S3009 (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display processing is executed (S3017) ), Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Here, the details of the demonstration display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a demonstration display process. This process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the finalized display effect.

  In the demonstration display effect, first, it is determined whether or not the display special effect flag 233k is on (S3801). Then, when it is determined that the display special effect flag 233k is on (S3801: Yes), it indicates that the present is a special effect period, so in order to execute the demonstration effect in the special effect mode, the special effect The demo display data table is acquired from the data table storage area 233b2 and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3802), and the process shifts to the processing of S3804.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the display special effect flag 233k is not on (that is, off) (S3801: No), it indicates that the present is the normal effect period, so the demonstration effect is executed in the normal effect mode In order to do this, a demonstration display data table is acquired from the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and set in the display data table storage area 233d (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3804.

  In the process of S3804 performed after the process of S3802 or S3803, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3804). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3805). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3006), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3007), this processing is ended, and display setting processing (S2103) Return.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting a display data table which specifies to stop and display the image of (FIG. 12 (b) or (c)) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 45 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 45 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3402). In this processing of S3402, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3402 (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the process of S3401, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3403, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 35B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 41 to 44) are performed, drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) (see S3301: No in FIG. 45A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233 to indicate that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3506 (S3506: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3510), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  In the process of S3513, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S 3513 (S 3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 3602). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 35B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, a period in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode (normal effect period) and a period in which the effect is executed in a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode ( There are two types of periods, ie, the special effect period), and it is determined by the audio lamp control device 114 based on the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 which period is currently. Then, when the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110, the variation pattern type corresponding to the determined presentation period is selected, and variation is made in third symbol display device 81 based on the selected variation pattern type. A pattern effect is performed.

  Also, each time it is determined by the sound lamp control device 114 that the effect period has been switched to a different effect period, a command corresponding to the effect period after the change is output to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 determines the current effect period based on the command output by the audio lamp control device 114, and selects the display data table corresponding to the round effect or the demonstration effect based on the determined effect period. Do.

  Thereby, the variation pattern effect, the round effect, and the demonstration effect of the demonstration effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 are executed in the normal effect mode or in the special effect mode according to the elapsed time. Do. Therefore, since the player can be made to feel novelty whenever switching to a different rendering mode, it is possible to suppress that the game becomes monotonous, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the effect period is determined by the sound lamp control device 114, the time is determined from the time information (time information) of the time counting device 262, and the type of effect period is switched according to the time zone. Rather, the elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in the startup process and the time information acquired in the elapsed time confirmation process, and the type of effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. There is. Thereby, even if the time information of the clocking devices 262 of the respective pachinko machines 10 deviates from each other due to aged deterioration or the like in the hall where the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the time information of the mutually deviated time information is displayed The influence of the deviation can be reduced because it can be converted to a relative value of elapsed time T and used for determination of the type of the rendering period, not directly for the determination of the type of.

  Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing to switch from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period based on the elapsed time T and the timing to switch from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the presentation period of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, a part of pachinko machine 10 becomes a normal presentation period, and the other pachinko machine 10 becomes a special presentation period, and the player who is playing a game is It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed in a different effect mode from the other pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the time information acquired in the start-up process based on the power-on is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262 Since the device 262 continues to be supplied with power from the clock device power supply 263 even in the power-off state, the time information stored in the on-time storage area 352b is held even in the power-off state. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, it is stored not in the time information clocked by the clocking device 262 at the time of the power on but in the on time storage area storage area 352b. The time information that has been stored is stored in the time information storage area 223 f of the RAM 223, and is used to determine the elapsed time T.

  Thus, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is electrically disconnected, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an inspection of the entrance is performed. Even when it is necessary to set the state, time acquisition processing when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off last time, just by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on Thus, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 and stored in the input time storage area 352b of the time counting device 262 when being switched off can be stored again in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 .

  Therefore, if power is simultaneously turned on to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in a hole with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, then one pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Also, simply by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on again, the elapsed time T can be determined based on time information when the power is turned on all at once. Therefore, based on the same elapsed time T as other gaming machines, it is possible to match the timing for switching from the normal rendering period to the special rendering period and the timing for switching from the special rendering period to the normal rendering period. It is possible to suppress the timing at which the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the production mode from being shifted, and the player who is playing the game feels uncomfortable for the production being performed in a different production mode from the other pachinko machines 10 Can be suppressed.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 53, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, time information (clocking information) is acquired from the clocking device 262, and the type of effect period is determined based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, the time information (clocking information) acquired from the clocking device 262 based on turning on the power is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the clocking device The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (clocking information) clocked by 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence relationship between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is the normal effect period or the special effect period, and is specified It is comprised so that the presentation according to the presentation period may be performed.

  In addition, when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at the time of turning on the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turning on time storage area 352b Are configured to be stored.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the time counting device 262 is configured to count the elapsed time since the power is turned on, the type of the present effect period is determined based on the elapsed time, and the determined effect period It is configured to execute a corresponding effect.

  More specifically, an elapsed time counter 352c whose count value is updated every one second is provided in the register 352 of the time counting device 262, and power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b. The elapsed time T of is identified. Then, based on the elapsed time T and the effect switching table 222b, the type of the effect period can be specified.

  When the RAM erase switch 122 is off at the time of power on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is on at the time of power on. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is configured to be held without being initialized.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that an elapsed time counter 352c is provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 instead of the closing time storage area 352b. It is a point that The partial process included in the start-up process (FIG. 26) and the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
First, with reference to FIG. 48, the electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the timing device 262 of the present embodiment has the register 352, and the register 352 has a register table composed of a plurality of registers shown in FIG. The register table includes a clock register 352a and an elapsed time counter 352c. That is, in the clocking device 262 of this embodiment, an elapsed time counter 352c is provided in place of the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The elapsed time counter 352 c is a counter used to specify an elapsed time since power on based on the count value. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352 c is updated every one second, and is initialized (reset) based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c specifies the elapsed time T from the power on in the elapsed time check process 2 (see S1331 in FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect switching table 222b. Is used to specify the type of presentation period based on

  Here, the details of the elapsed time counter 352c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 schematically shows a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. The registers assigned to addresses 0H to 6H of the register table (clocking register 352a) and the registers assigned to the addresses AH to EH are the registers assigned to the addresses 0H to 6H in the first embodiment, and the addresses AH to EH. It has the same configuration and function as the registers assigned to. On the other hand, the addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the elapsed time counter 352c. In the first embodiment, in the entry time storage area 352b, the register for storing seconds, the register for storing minutes, and the register for storing time are allocated to the addresses 7H to 9H, respectively. A register to count, a register to count minutes, and a register to count time are assigned to the addresses 7H to 9H, respectively.

  The register for counting the second assigned to the address 7H has the same configuration as the register (the register assigned to the address 0H) representing the second of the time-counting register 352a described in the first embodiment. The number of seconds in the elapsed time is represented depending on whether each bit of bit 0 to bit 6 corresponding to second, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds is H or L, respectively. The register that counts this second is updated one by one every 1 second from the 0 second state (all bits are L states), and the 0 second state when the register is updated in the 59 second state ( All bits are configured to return to the state of L).

  The register for counting the minutes assigned to the address 8H has the same configuration as the register (the register assigned to the address 1H) representing the minutes of the time-counting register 352a, and is 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes, 8 minutes Depending on whether each bit of bit 0 to bit 6 corresponding to each of the minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, and 40 minutes is H or L, it is expressed what the fraction of the elapsed time is. The register that counts this minute is updated one by one every time the register that counts the second is updated from the 59-second state to the 0-second state (all bits are L), and the state is 59 minutes. When the register is updated, it is configured to return to the 0 minute state (all bits are in the L state).

  Further, the register for counting the time allocated to the address 9H has the same configuration as the register (the register allocated to the address 2H) representing the time of the clocking register 352a, and has 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 3 hours. Depending on whether each bit of bit 0 to bit 5 corresponding to time, 10 hours, and 20 hours is H or L, it is expressed how many hours are in the elapsed time. The register that counts this time is updated one by one every time the register that counts the minute is updated from the 59-minute state to the 0-minute state (all bits are in the L state), and in the 24-hour state When the register is updated, it is configured to return to the 0 hour state (all bits are in the L state).

  The elapsed time from the power-on can be specified by referring to the count value of the register that counts these seconds, minutes, and times. Then, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized. Therefore, in the hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the elapsed time of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on the power to the plurality of gaming machines simultaneously with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. All count values of the counter 352c are initialized. Therefore, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player playing the game has an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  Further, as described above, the clocking device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the clocking device power supply 263, which is a power supply different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, it is possible to continue the update of the count value by the elapsed time counter 352c. Then, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the elapsed time counter 352c at the time of turning on the power is The count value is updated from the continuation of the count value. Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is electrically disconnected, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or inspection of the entrance is performed. Even if it is necessary to do so, it is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from being initialized simply by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is possible to suppress deviation of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been switched off. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player who is playing a game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 in an effect mode It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity with the effect being performed.

  In the present embodiment, the elapsed time counter 352c is provided separately from the clock register 352a in the register 352 of the clock device 262, but the clock register 352a is turned on each time the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch turned off. The timing information of may be reset so that all of bit0 to bit6 are L. Thereby, the time counting register 352a can be used similarly to the elapsed time counter 352c. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the elapsed time counter 352c, and the number of registers can be reduced, so that the price can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113, the elapsed time T is calculated based on the time information (clocking information) acquired from the clocking device 262, but instead, it is fixed time The elapsed time T may be determined on the basis of the information (e.g., 10:00) and the time information (clocking information) counted by the clocking device 262. In this case, the information on the fixed time may be defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 or may be stored in the register 352 of the timing device 262. Thus, when power is turned on, time information (clocking information) counted by the clocking device 262 is acquired, or when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f is stored in the register 352 of the clocking device 262. Since it is not necessary to store the input time storage area 352b, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

Regarding Control Processing in Second Embodiment
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. The start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In each of the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 among the startup processes, the same process as each process of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the start-up process in the second embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) is replaced with the time acquisition process (S1211) of the start-up process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. To do).

  That is, in the start-up process in the second embodiment, after the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the elapsed time counter initialization process is executed (S1221), and the interrupt permission is set (S1212). ), Shift to main processing. The elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) is a process for initializing the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c, and is a process for counting the elapsed time starting from the power on.

  Here, details of the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) will be described with reference to FIG. In the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221), first, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1511). Then, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch is on (S1511: Yes), this process ends and the process returns to the start-up process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is not on (that is, off) (S1511: No), the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 is initialized (S1512) , End this process.

  As described above, in the elapsed time counter initialization process, when the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352 c is initialized. Therefore, in the hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the elapsed time of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on the power to the plurality of gaming machines simultaneously with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. All count values of the counter 352c are initialized. Therefore, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player playing the game has an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  In the elapsed time counter initialization process, when the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the continuation of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c at the time of turning on the power is continued. The count value is updated. Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is electrically disconnected, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or inspection of the entrance is performed. Even if it is necessary to do so, it is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from being initialized simply by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is possible to suppress deviation of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been switched off. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player who is playing a game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 in an effect mode It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity with the effect being performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Among the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, in each processing of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318 and S1319, S1301 of the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319 is executed. Then, in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, when the processing of S1310 is completed, in the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. Instead, the elapsed time check process 2 (S1331) is executed.

  That is, in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, after the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S1310) is executed, the elapsed time confirmation processing 2 is executed (S1331), and the processing shifts to command determination processing (S1313). . The elapsed time check process 2 (S1331) is a process for specifying the elapsed time since the power is turned on based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c, and determining the type of effect period.

  In the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, processing equivalent to the processing of S1317 in the main processing (FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is not performed. The processing of S1317 of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is provided with the time information at power on stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 in the register 352 of the clock 262 This processing is performed to store the time information in the power on time storage area 352b and to hold time data even in the power-off state, and the power-off state when the power is turned on again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is a process required to specify the elapsed time T based on the same time information as before. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, instead of determining the elapsed time T based on time information at the time of power on, the power is turned on based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. It is not necessary to hold the time information at power-on in the power-off state, and it is not necessary to perform the processing corresponding to S1317.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, an elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Elapsed time check process 2 (S1331) is a process executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for determining the type of the current effect period based on the elapsed time T from the power on. It is.

  Of the elapsed time check process 2 (S1331), in each process of S1603 to 1612, the same process as the process of each of the elapsed time check process (S1311) in the first embodiment (S1311) is executed. Then, in elapsed time check processing 2 (S1331) in the second embodiment, each processing of S1621 and S1622 is executed instead of each processing of S1601 and S1602 of the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) in the first embodiment. Be done.

  That is, when the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) is executed, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c of the time counting device 262 is read (S1621), and the elapsed time T from power on is calculated based on the read count value. It specifies (S1622) and shifts to processing of S1603. And as above-mentioned, regarding each processing after S1603, the processing same as each processing after S1603 of the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) in the first embodiment is executed.

  The type of the current effect period is determined by the elapsed time check process 2 (S1331), and the state of the special effect flag 223e is changed according to the type of the effect period determined. Therefore, it is indicated whether it is a special effect period or a normal effect period depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, so that the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). When selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110 in S1402 of 30), the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 is confirmed and the special effect period It is not necessary to determine whether it is or not, and it is sufficient to simply check whether the special effect flag 223e is on. Therefore, the process for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the register 352 of the time counting device 262 is provided with the elapsed time counter 352c whose count value is updated every one second, and based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b. , And an elapsed time T from turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 is specified. Then, based on the elapsed time T and the effect switching table 222b, the type of the effect period can be specified.

  When the RAM erase switch 122 is off at the time of power on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is on at the time of power on. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is configured to be held without being initialized.

  Thereby, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, so a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed. In the existing hall, all the count values of the elapsed time counter 352c of each pachinko machine 10 are initialized only by turning on the power at the same time to the plurality of gaming machines with the RAM erase switch 122 off. . Therefore, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player playing the game has an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  Further, as described above, the clocking device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the clocking device power supply 263, which is a power supply different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, it is possible to continue the update of the count value by the elapsed time counter 352c. Then, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the elapsed time counter 352c at the time of turning on the power is The count value is updated from the continuation of the count value. Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is electrically disconnected, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or inspection of the entrance is performed. Even if it is necessary to do so, it is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from being initialized simply by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is possible to suppress deviation of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been switched off. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player who is playing a game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 in an effect mode It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity with the effect being performed.

<Modification Example of Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the elapsed time check process 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the clock 262 is acquired. Although the type of effect period is determined from the elapsed time T determined based on the acquired count value and the effect period table 222b, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b in the timing device 262 is used. Alternatively, the type of effect period may be determined based on the determination, and only the determination result may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this case, the determination result may be notified each time the type of the effect period is determined, or may be notified only when switching to a different effect period. In addition, in determining the type of effect period, the effect period table 222b provided in the ROM 222 may be read to determine the type of effect period, or the register 352 is equivalent to the information specified in the effect period table 222b. The information of (1) may be defined, and the type of the effect period may be determined with reference to this information. As a result, since the elapsed time check process 2 can be simplified, the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the elapsed time counter 352 c is provided only in the register 352 of the timing device 262, but similar counter means may be provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the counter value is cleared (reset) when the power is turned off, but when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, With reference to the value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the time counting device 262, the counter value may be set in the counter means of the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, it is not necessary to acquire the counter value from the elapsed time counter 352c of the time counting device 262 every time the elapsed time check process 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 The processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced because it is sufficient to refer to the value of the counter means provided in the above.

Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, time information (clocking information) is acquired from the clocking device 262, and the type of effect period is determined based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, the time information (clocking information) acquired from the clocking device 262 based on turning on the power is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the clocking device The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (clocking information) clocked by 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence relationship between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is the normal effect period or the special effect period, and is specified It is comprised so that the presentation according to the presentation period may be performed.

  In addition, when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at the time of turning on the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turning on time storage area 352b Are configured to be stored.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a clock counter 223g which is updated by decrementing the counter value by 1 every 1 millisecond. The type of effect period can be identified based on the counter value of.

  In addition, when the RAM erase switch 122 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the counter value of the clock counter 223g is configured to set an initial value of 3599999 (counter value corresponding to one hour). ing. When the power is turned off, the counter value is stored in the counter value storage area 352e provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262, and is maintained even in the power-off state. When the RAM erase switch 122 is on when the power is turned on, the counter value stored in the counter value storage area 352e provided in the register 352 of the clocking device 262 is used as the counter value of the clocking counter 223g. The initial value of the clock counter 223g is set based on the power-off state and the period of the power-off state.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that a clock counter 223g is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a clocking device 262. In the second register 352, the disconnection time storage area 352d and the counter value storage area 352e are provided instead of the insertion time storage area 352b. The partial process included in the start-up process (FIG. 26) and the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a RAM 223 as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the RAM 223, a clock counter 223g is provided in place of the time information storage area 223f provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The time counter 223g is used to specify the type of effect period according to the counter value. In the time counter 223g, 1 is subtracted from the previous value each time the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed by the counter update processing (S1341) executed in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113. After reaching 0, the loop counter returns to the initial value 3599999. Since the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed every 1 ms, the time counter 223g returns to the initial value every 3600 seconds (that is, 1 hour). The relationship between the count value of the clock counter 223g and the type of effect period is that the normal effect period is determined when the counter value is in the range of 0 to 299,999 (counter value equivalent to 50 minutes), and the counter value is 3000000 to In the range of 3599999 (counter value corresponding to 10 minutes), it is determined to be a special effect period. That is, every time the counter makes a round, a 50-minute normal rendering period and a 10-minute special rendering period come.

  As described above, if one game is played for one hour, the game is always switched to a different presentation period, so that the player can feel novelty by switching the presentation period. Therefore, even if the player is playing the game for a long time, only the same effect occurs, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game. Further, since the 50-minute normal effect period and the 10-minute special effect period are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time period to be the special effect period and the time period to be the normal effect period. . Therefore, it is possible to start the game aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect aspect suited to the player's taste is performed for each player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the clocking device 262 of the present embodiment has the register 352, and the register 352 has a register table composed of a plurality of registers shown in FIG. The register table includes a clock register 352a, a disconnection time storage area 352d, and a counter value storage area 352e. That is, the timing device 262 of the present embodiment is provided with a disconnection time storage area 352 d and a counter value storage area 352 e instead of the insertion time storage area 352 b provided in the register 352 in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The disconnection time storage area 352 d is a register that stores time information (clocking information) being clocked by the clocking device 262 at that time, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The counter value storage area 352e is a register that stores the counter value of the clock counter 223g at that time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

  The disconnection time storage area 352 d and the counter value storage area 352 e will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. The registers allocated to the addresses 00H to 06H of the register table (clocking register 352a) and the registers allocated to the addresses 0DH to 11H are the registers allocated to the addresses 0H to 6H in the first embodiment, and the addresses AH to EH. It has the same configuration and function as the registers assigned to. On the other hand, the addresses 07H to 09H correspond to the disconnection time storage area 352d, and the addresses 0AH to 0CH correspond to the counter value storage area 352e. In the first embodiment, in the entry time storage area 352b, the register for storing the second, the register for storing the minute, and the register for storing the time are respectively allocated to the addresses 7H to 9H. The area 352 d also has the same configuration as this.

  On the other hand, in the counter value storage area 352e, a power of 2 is associated with each bit. Specifically, in the bit 0 to bit 7 of the register assigned to the address 0A, the second power of 0 (i.e. 1), the second power of 2 (i.e. 2), the second power of 2 (i.e. 4), 2 3 (ie 8) 2 2 4 (ie 16) 2 2 5 (ie 32) 2 2 6 (ie 64) 2 2 7 (ie 128), Two seventh powers (i.e., 256) are associated with one another. Similarly, bit 0 to bit 7 of the register assigned to address 0B are associated with 2 to the eighth power (i.e. 512) to 2 to the 15th power (i.e. 32768), and the register assigned to address 0C The 2nd to the 16th powers (i.e., 65,536) to the 2nd power of 2 (i.e., 8388,608) are associated with the bit0 to the bit7 of. By using the storage area for these three bytes, it is possible to represent all values from 0 to 3599999 which are values that the clock counter 223g can take.

  When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the disconnection time storage area 352 d and the counter value storage area 352 e are both clocked in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. It is used to set the initial value of the counter 223g. The details will be described later in the description of the counter initial value setting process (S1231) executed in the start-up process, but the power is off based on the time information stored in the disconnection time storage area 352d. The period is identified, and based on the period of the power interruption state, it is identified how many times the period corresponds to the update of the counter value. Then, based on the specified counter value and the counter value stored in the counter value storage area 352e, the initial value of the clock counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is set.

  As described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, an initial value is set in the clock counter 223g in consideration of the period during which the power is disconnected. For example, among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall, one pachinko machine 10 is turned off, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an inspection of the entrance is performed. If it is necessary to turn on the RAM erase switch 122 only by turning on the power again, a counter value corresponding to the count value of the clock counter 223g of the gaming machine which has not been turned off. Can be set as the initial value. Therefore, it can suppress that the counter value of the time counter 223g shifts | deviates with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 which was not made into the interruption | blocking state. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the counter value of the time counter 223g can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player who is playing the game has an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  When all bits of addresses 0AH and 0BH in counter value storage area 352e are H, and 0th to 5th bits of address 0CH are H, 6th and 7th bits are L, it is converted to the counter value of clock counter 223g. Then, it corresponds to 4194303 and exceeds 3599999 which is the maximum value of the counter value. That is, all possible values of the clock counter 223g can be represented without using the upper 2 bits of the register assigned to the address 0CH. Therefore, other information may be stored in the upper 2 bits of the address 0CH. As a result, the register table of the register 352 can be efficiently used, so that the increase of the capacity of the register 352 can be suppressed and the cost increase can be suppressed.

Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment
Next, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In each of the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 among the startup processes, the same process as each process of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the start-up process in the third embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the counter initial value setting process (S1231) is replaced with the time acquisition process (S1211) of the start-up process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. Run.

  That is, in the start-up process in the third embodiment, after the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the counter initial value setting process is executed (S1231), and the interrupt permission is set (S1212) , Shift to main processing. This counter initial value setting process (S1231) is a process of setting an initial value to the counter value of the clock counter 223g, starting updating of the counter value starting from power on, and determining the counter value as the effect period Is a process that is performed to make it usable.

  Here, the details of the counter initial value setting process (S1231) will be described with reference to FIG. In the counter initial value setting process (S1231), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1521). When it is determined that the RAM erase switch is not on (that is, off) (S1521: No), the initial value 3599999 is set in the clock counter 223g of the RAM 223 (S1522), and the special effect flag is off. Then (S1523), the process ends and returns to the start-up process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is on (S1521: Yes), when the pachinko machine 10 is switched off last time from the disconnection time storage area 352d provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 The clocked time information of the device 262 is acquired (S1524). Next, information on the current time is acquired from the time register 352a of the time counting device 262, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state based on the current time and the time information at the time of power failure acquired in the process of S1524. The period which has been reached is calculated (S1525), and the counter value of the clock counter 223g stored when the pachinko machine 10 is switched off last time is acquired from the counter value storage area 352e (S1526). Then, assuming that the update of the counter value of the clock counter 223g continues without entering the power-off state from the period of the power-off state calculated in the process of S1525 and the counter value obtained in the process of S1526, A value corresponding to the current counter value of the clock counter 223g is calculated (S1527), and the calculated counter value is set as an initial value of the clock counter 223g (S1528). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the initial value of the set time counter 223g is a value corresponding to the special effect period, that is, whether the set initial value is within the range of 3000000 to 3599999 (S1529) If it is determined that it is not a special effect period (ie, it is a normal effect period) (S1529: No), the special effect flag is turned off (S1523), and the process ends to return to the start-up process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1529 that it is a special effect period (S1529: Yes), the special effect flag is turned on (S1530), and the process ends and returns to the start-up process.

  As described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the count counter 223g at the time of power interruption is set to the clock counter 223g, and the power is turned off. Since an initial value is set in consideration of the period of the state, for example, a plurality of board installed in the hall may be necessary because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection is performed. Of the pachinko machines 10, even if it is necessary to turn off one pachinko machine 10, turning the power on again while the RAM erase switch 122 is on will bring the machine into the power-off state. A counter value corresponding to the counter value of the time counter 223g of the gaming machine which has not been set can be set as the initial value. Therefore, it can suppress that the counter value of the time counter 223g shifts | deviates with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 which was not made into the interruption | blocking state. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the counter value of the time counter 223g can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player who is playing the game has an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Among the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, in each processing of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318 and S1319, S1301 of the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319 is executed. Then, in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when the processing of S1310 is completed, in the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. Instead, a counter update process (S1331) is performed. Furthermore, in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when the processing of S1316 is completed, in the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. Instead, the processes of S1332 and S1333 are performed.

  That is, in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, after the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S1310) is executed, the counter updating processing is executed (S1341), and the processing shifts to command determination processing (S1313). This counter update process (S1341) is a process for specifying the elapsed time since the power is turned on based on the counter value of the clock counter 223g, and determining the type of effect period. Further, in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1314: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing The middle flag is turned on together (S1316), and information indicating the current time updated by the time register 352a of the time counting device 262 is stored in the disconnection time storage area 352d (S1332), and the counter value of the time counter 223g is measured. The data is stored in the counter value storage area 352e of the device 262 (S1333). Thereafter, the power-off process is executed (S1318), the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1319), and the process is infinitely looped. The processes of S1332 and S1333 are information used to set the initial value of the counter value of the clock counter 223g when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, It is a process for storing in the register 352 of the clocking device 262 in order to hold it even during the power-off state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 60, the counter updating process (S1331) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing counter update processing (S1331). The counter update process is a process for updating the value of the clock counter 223g and determining the type of the current effect period based on the updated counter value.

  In this counter update process, it is checked whether the counter value of the clock counter 223g is 0 (S3701), and if the counter value is 0 (S3701: Yes), 3599999 which is the initial value is added to the clock counter 223g. The setting is made (S3703), and the process proceeds to the processing of S3704. On the other hand, if the counter value is other than 0 (S3701: No), the counter value of the clock counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S3702), and the process proceeds to the process of S3704.

  In the process of S3704, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the clock counter 223g updated by the process of S3702 or S3703 is a value indicating a special effect period, that is, whether it is within the range of 3000000 to 3599999. (S3704).

  When it is determined that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is a value indicating a special effect period (S3704: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S3709), and the special effect flag 223e is selected. Is determined to be on (S3709: Yes), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S3709: No), the special effect flag is turned on (S3710), and a special effect command is set (S3711). A command is set (S3712), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is not a value indicating a special effect period (that is, a value indicating a normal effect period) (S3704: No), the special effect flag 223e is on. If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S3705: No), this processing ends, and the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. Return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3705: Yes), the special effect flag is turned off (S3706), a normal effect command is set (S3707), and a rear image change command is set (S3705) S3708), the process ends, and the process returns to the main process of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Since whether it is a special effect period or a normal effect period is indicated depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, the variation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) ), When selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 is checked and it is a special effect period or not It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is on or not. Therefore, the process for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with the clock counter 223g whose counter value is updated each time the main processing is executed, and the counter value of the clock counter 223g. It is comprised so that the classification of the presentation period can be specified based on.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is switched off, information indicating the current time updated by the time register 352a of the time unit 262 and the counter value of the time counter 223g are sent to the register 352 of the time unit 262. It is configured to memorize. When the RAM erase switch 122 is on at the time of power on, the count value of the clock counter 223g is set based on the time information at the time of the power-off state and the count value of the clock counter 223g. If it is assumed that the update of the counter value of the clock counter 223g continues without entering the power-off state, a value corresponding to the counter value of 223g of the current clock counter is set. On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 122 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the counter value of the clock counter 223g is set to the initial value (ie, 3599999).

  As a result, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the initial value of 3599999 is set to the counter value of the clock counter 223g. In the hall where the game machine is installed, all the counter values of the clock counter 223g of each pachinko machine 10 are all initial only by turning on the power simultaneously to the plurality of game machines with the RAM erase switch 122 off. It is set to the value 3599999. Therefore, since the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the time counter 223g can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game performs in an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10 Can be suppressed from feeling unnatural about what is being performed.

  Further, as described above, the clocking device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the clocking device power supply 263, which is a power supply different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, when the power-off state is entered, the time information at the time of the power-off state stored in the disconnection time storage area 352d or the counter value storage area 352e. It is possible to hold the stored counter value of the clock counter 223g at the time of the power interruption state.

  Then, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the initial value of 3599999 is not set to the counter value of the clock counter 223g, and the power is cut off. The counter value is set in consideration of the counter value of the time counter 223g and the period during which the power is disconnected, so that, for example, a failure of the pachinko machine 10 may require board replacement or an inspection of the entrance etc. Even if it is necessary to turn off one of the pachinko machines 10 among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall due to the reason described above, the power supply is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. The counter value corresponding to the counter value of the clock counter 223g of the gaming machine which has not been turned off is set as the initial value only by Rukoto can.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the counter value of the clock counter 223g deviates with respect to the other pachinko machine 10 which is not brought into the power-off state. As a result, the types of effect periods determined based on the counter value of the time counter 223g can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, so the player who is playing the game has an effect mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being performed.

  In the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to one hour is initially set in the clock counter 223g, and the counter value is subtracted. However, the counter value is added up to the counter value of the corresponding time. You may comprise so that it may discriminate | determine. Also, a plurality of counters may be provided and configured by 8-bit counters, and may be configured to carry with each upper limit value. With this configuration, the number of bits of each counter can be reduced, and the counters can be easily configured. In addition, the counter may be configured by a counter IC or the like for clocking.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, time information (clocking information) is acquired from the clocking device 262, and the type of effect period is determined based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, the time information (clocking information) acquired from the clocking device 262 based on turning on the power is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the clocking device The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (clocking information) clocked by 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence relationship between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is the normal effect period or the special effect period, and is specified It is comprised so that the presentation according to the presentation period may be performed.

  In addition, when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at the time of turning on the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turning on time storage area 352b Are configured to be stored.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the type of the current presentation period is determined based on time information (clocking information) counted by the timing device 262 and a period information table in which the type of the presentation period is defined for each time. It is configured to determine.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that a period information table 222 c is provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the effect switching table 222 b. The point is that the period information storage area 223h is provided in place of the time information storage area 223f in the RAM 223, and the entry time storage area 352b is not provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. The partial process included in the start-up process (FIG. 26) and the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a ROM 222 and a RAM 223 as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Then, in the ROM 222, a period information table 222c is provided in place of the effect switching table 222b provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Further, in the RAM 223, a period information storage area 223h is provided in place of the time information storage area 223f provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The period information table 222c defines the type of effect period for each time, and is used to specify the type of current effect period with reference to time information (time information) counted by the clock 262. . The period information storage area 223h is an area for storing the type of effect period for each time defined in the period information table 222c, and the period of the ROM 222 in the table acquisition process (S1241) of the startup process (FIG. 64). The information defined in the information table 222c is read and stored.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 62, the details of the period information table 222c provided in the ROM 222 will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the period information table 222c. As shown in FIG. 62, in the period information table 222c, the type of effect period is defined in association with time. When the time indicates a normal effect period, a special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a display special effect flag 233k provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. Turns off. Then, based on these flags, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in the normal effect mode. On the other hand, when the time indicates a special effect period, a special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 and a special effect for display provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. The flag 233k is turned on. Then, based on these flags, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in a special effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in this embodiment, 60 minutes between 9:00 and 10:00 is a normal rendering period, and 10 minutes thereafter, and between 10:00 and 10:10 minutes. It is considered a special production period. Then, after 10 minutes which is considered as the special effect period has passed, it is again considered as the normal effect period, and the normal effect period continues for 50 minutes until 11:00. After that, the special rendering period of 10 minutes and the regular rendering period of 50 minutes are alternately repeated.

  As described above, except for 60 minutes from 9:00 to 10:00, if one game is played for one hour, it always switches to a different presentation period, so that the presentation period is changed and the player feels novelty to the player It can be done. Therefore, even if the player is playing the game for a long time, only the same effect occurs, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game. In addition, since the special rendering period of 10 minutes and the regular rendering period of 50 minutes are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone of the special rendering period and the time zone of the normal rendering period. . Therefore, it is possible to start the game aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect aspect suited to the player's taste is performed for each player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In FIG. 62, the correspondence between the time when the time is 12:00 or later and the type of the presentation period (period information table) is omitted, but it is actually 10 minutes special even after 12:00. The rendering period and the normal rendering period of 50 minutes are alternately repeated. The time of the period information table 222c may be set to at least the business closing time of the hall, and for example, the correspondence between 9:00 to 22:45 may be defined. Also, the correspondence may be set in the range from 9:00 to 9:00 the next day. In addition, the kind of presentation period is not necessarily restricted to two types of a normal presentation period and a special presentation period, You may provide three or more types of presentation periods in which the aspect of the presentation performed mutually differs.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the timing device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The clocking device 262 of the present embodiment includes the register 352 as in the first embodiment, and includes the clocking register 352 a provided in the register 352 in the first embodiment, but the closing time storage area I do not have 352b. That is, in the present embodiment, the register 352 is used only for the purpose of clocking time, and is not used to hold information during the power-off state as in the first embodiment. In addition, about another structure, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

Regarding Control Process in Fourth Embodiment
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. The start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In each of the processes of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 among the startup processes, the same process as each process of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the startup process in the third embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the table acquisition process (S1241) is executed instead of the time acquisition process (S1211) of the startup process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. Do.

  That is, in the start-up process in the fourth embodiment, after the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the table acquisition process is executed (S1241), the interrupt permission is set (S1212), the main Transfer to processing. This table acquisition process (S1241) is a process of acquiring the correspondence (period information table) between the time defined in the period information table 222c of the ROM 222 and the type of effect period, and is defined in the period information table 222c. This processing is performed to enable the correspondence relationship to be used to determine the effect period.

  Here, the details of the table acquisition process (S1241) will be described with reference to FIG. In the table acquisition process (S1241), the correspondence relationship (period information table) between the time specified in the period information table and the type of presentation period is read from the ROM 222 (S1531), and the read correspondence is applied to the period information storage area 223h. Store (1532). Thereafter, the current time information (clocking information) clocked by 262 of the clocking device is read out, and the type of the current presentation period is specified based on the time information and the correspondence stored in the period information storage area 223h. (S1533).

  In the process of S1534, it is determined whether or not the specific result in the process of S1533 is a special effect period (S1534). If it is determined that it is a special effect period (S1534: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned on. (S1535) This processing ends, and returns to the start-up processing. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1534, when it is determined that it is not a special rendering period (that is, it is a normal rendering period) (S1534: No), the special rendering flag 223e is turned off (S1536), and this processing is ended and started up. Return to processing.

  As described above, each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the correspondence defined in the period information table 222c is stored in the period information storage area 223h, so the correspondence between the time and the type of the presentation period ( The same period information table can be referred to each time regardless of whether or not the power is turned off. Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is turned off due to a substrate replacement being required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an inspection of the entrance being performed. If it is necessary to turn on the power again, the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off will use the time used to determine the type of effect period and the type of effect period Can be stored in the period information storage area 223 h of the RAM 223. Therefore, the types of effect periods determined based on the correspondence stored in the period information storage area 223h can also be made to match in each pachinko machine 10, so the player who is playing the game can not match with other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being executed in different effect modes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Among the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, in each processing of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318 and S1319, S1301 of the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319 is executed. Then, in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, when the processing of S1310 is completed, in the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. Instead, time confirmation processing (S1351) is executed.

  That is, in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the time confirmation processing (S1351) is executed after the execution of the liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S1310), and the processing shifts to command determination processing (S1313). In this time confirmation process (S1351), the time information (clocking information) measured by the clocking device 262 and the correspondence (period information table) between the time and the effect type stored in the period information storage area of the RAM 223 It is a process for determining the type of the present effect period based on it.

  In the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, processing equivalent to the processing of S1317 in the main processing (FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is not performed. The processing of S1317 of the main processing (FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is provided with the time information at power on stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 in the register 352 of the clock 262 This processing is performed to store the time information in the power on time storage area 352b and to hold time data even in the power-off state, and the power-off state when the power is turned on again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is a process required to specify the elapsed time T based on the same time information as before. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the type of effect period is determined using the time information itself clocked by the time counting device 262 without using the elapsed time T. There is no need to hold it in the disconnected state, and there is no need to perform the processing corresponding to S1317.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the time confirmation processing (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The time confirmation process (S1351) is a process executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process of determining the type of effect period based on time information counted by the clock device.

  In this time confirmation process, the current time information clocked by the clock device 262 is read (S3801), and the correspondence between the read time information and the time stored in the period information storage area of the RAM 223 and the type of effect period ( The period information table is compared (S3802).

  Then, as a result of comparison, it is determined whether or not the current time indicates a special effect period (S3803), and when it is determined that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is a value indicating a special effect period (S3803) : Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on (S3808), and when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3808: Yes), this processing ends, and the audio lamp control is performed. The processing returns to the main processing of the device 113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S3808: No), the special effect flag is turned on (S3809), and a special effect command is set (S3810). A command is set (S3811), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  When it is determined in the process of S3803 that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is not a value indicating a special effect period (that is, a value indicating a normal effect period) (S3803: No), the special effect flag 223e is on. If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S3804: No), this processing ends, and the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. Return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3804: Yes), the special effect flag is turned off (S3805), a normal effect command is set (S3806), and a rear surface image change command is set (S3806) S3807), the process ends, and the process returns to the main process of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Since whether it is a special effect period or a normal effect period is indicated depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, the variation pattern selection process (see S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) ), When selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (clocking information) of the clocking device 262 is checked and it is a special effect period or not It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is on or not. Therefore, the process for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the type of effect period can be identified based on the correspondence between the time stored in the period information storage area 223 h provided in the RAM 223 and the effect period. Configured.

  In addition, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory that is not backed up, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the information stored in the period information storage area 223h is cleared, but the non-volatile memory is Since the correspondence (period information table) between the time and the type of presentation period is defined in the period information table 222c of the ROM 222 which is composed of the period information specified in the period information table 222c when the power is turned on again. By storing the table in the period information storage area 223h, the type of effect period can be determined based on the same period information table as that before the power-off state.

  Therefore, for example, one pachinko machine 10 of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is turned off due to a substrate replacement being required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an inspection of the entrance being performed. If it is necessary to turn on the power again, the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off will use the time used to determine the type of effect period and the type of effect period Can be stored in the period information storage area 223 h of the RAM 223. Therefore, the types of effect periods determined based on the correspondence stored in the period information storage area 223h can also be made to match in each pachinko machine 10, so the player who is playing the game can not match with other pachinko machines 10 It can be suppressed that a sense of incongruity is felt to the effect being executed in different effect modes.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the register 352 of the clocking device 262 stores time information at the time of power-on and time information at the time of transition to the power-off state, or provides a counter whose value is periodically updated. Not. That is, since the time counting device 262 is used only to obtain the present time, the capacity of the register 352 can be smaller than in the other embodiments. Therefore, cost reduction of the clocking device 262 can be achieved by the reduction of the storage capacity.

  In this embodiment, the period information table storage area 222c that defines the correspondence (period information table) between the time and the type of effect period is provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The correspondence between the time and the type of the rendering period may be defined in the ROM 202, or the correspondence between the time and the type of the rendering period may be stored in the register 352 of the clock device 262. In this case, in the table acquisition process (S1231) of the startup process (FIG. 64), the correspondence (period information table) between the time and the type of presentation period is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 or the register 352 of the timing device 262. It is good to control so that it may read out from and stored in the engine information storage area 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the correspondence between the time and the type of effect period is stored in the register 352 of the time counting device 262, the time information (time counting information) counted by the time counting device 262, the time stored in the register 352, and the effect period The timing device 262 may be configured to determine the current effect period based on the correspondence relationship (period information table) with the type of the object. In this case, the clocking device 262 is caused to perform the processing of S3801 to S3803 of the time confirmation processing (S1351) executed in the main processing (FIG. 66) of the audio lamp control device 113. It may be notified whether the type of the rendering period of is a special rendering period. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, effects are produced from the time information (clocking information) timed by the clocking device 262 and the correspondence (period information table) between the time stored in the period information storage area 223h and the type of effect period. Although the type of the period is determined, instead of this, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a counter means, and the value is periodically updated based on the power on. The elapsed time T may be determined based on the value.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223 f of the RAM 223 is switched to the insertion time storage area 352 b provided in the register 352 of the clock 262 when the power is cut off. If the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the on time storage area 352b is changed to the time when the power is turned on, in the RAM 223. It is configured to be stored in the time information storage area 223f.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the time information can be set by the player, and the third symbol display device 81 or the like is notified of a predetermined notification mode based on the set time. Is configured.

  The configurational difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is set by the player operating the operation input unit 23 in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. A setting time storage area 223i for storing the set time information is added, and when it is determined that the time information is set in the set time storage area 223i, a process of notifying a notification mode is added. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration in the first embodiment except that a set time storage area 223i is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 has an operation input unit. 23 are electrically connected. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  The set time storage area 223i is an area in which time information set by the player operating the operation input unit 23 is stored. When time information is stored in the set time storage area 223i, a notification mode is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the fact that the set time has come. The time information set in the set time storage area 223i is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In the initial setting, preset initial data is set. When this initial data is set, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to determine that time information is not set in the set time storage area 223i (FIG. 71). S4002: No).

  The operation input unit 23 is provided on the left side (not shown) of the frame button 22 so that the player can operate, and the input operation unit and its setting so that the player can set any time And a display unit capable of confirming the time of day when The input operation unit is provided with respective operation units (press buttons) so as to set hours, minutes, and seconds. When the player operates the operation unit, one of the information (hour, minute, second) corresponding to the operated operation unit is added (for example, if it is hour, it is one hour, if it is minute, it is one minute and second If there is, it is configured to be made every second. In addition, if it adds up to each upper limit, it will be set to 0 which is an initial value. The operation input unit 23 is provided with a determination operation unit, and when the player operates the determination operation unit, the time currently displayed on the display unit is set in the pachinko machine 10 as the set time. It is configured.

  Specifically, based on the determination operation unit being operated, the time information displayed on the display unit is stored in the set time storage area 223i in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. Then, when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines that the set time has been set, a display command for displaying the character "the set time has come!" Is set on the third symbol display device 81. Do.

  In the present embodiment, the operation input unit 23 is configured to set the time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an aspect (for example, a character, a symbol, a character, a background color, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 To be able to set the type of sound output from the audio output device 226, the lighting color and the lighting mode to be turned on by the lamp display device 227, etc. It may be configured.

  Further, although the present embodiment is configured to notify the notification mode when the time set by the player comes, the present invention is not limited thereto, but the variation pattern table of the special symbol set in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The type may be set to be switched, or the type (mode) of the variation pattern table may be designated and switched. By configuring in this way, when the time set by the player comes, the variation pattern of the special symbol is switched, so it is recognized that the set time has come without being noticed by other players while playing a game be able to. Also, the player can enjoy the predetermined variation pattern at any time.

  Here, the change pattern table to be switched is set so that the change time and the change type (such as out-of-range or out-of-reach) are not different from those instructed by the main controller 110, and the types of displayed characters, The background color, the sound effect, the notice effect, etc. are changed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the time information set in the set time storage area 223i is initialized. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The operation unit may be provided with an operation unit (a push button) corresponding to the initialization of time information. As a result, even if the player who has set the time information for performing the notification has stopped the game before the set time has come, the player who is to play the game next time is the input of the operation input unit 23 The time information can be initialized only by operating the operation unit.

  In addition, the storage area (set time storage area 223i) for storing the set time information is not provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, but provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Even in the state, the setting time information may be held without being initialized. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off against the intention of the player who has set the set time information, for example, because board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an entrance inspection is performed. Even if the setting time information is closed, the setting time information can be suppressed from being initialized, so that the notification can be surely given to the player based on the setting time information set by the player.

Regarding Control Processing in Fifth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, notification time setting processing (S1311 in FIG. 29) is performed instead of the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311 in FIG. 29) of the main processing (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. S1361 of FIG. 70 and the notification process (S1362 of FIG. 71) are respectively added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a notification time setting process (S1361) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the notification time setting process (S1361).

  In the notification time setting process (S1361 in FIG. 70), first, it is determined whether the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 is operated (S3901). If it is determined that the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 is not operated (S3901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 is operated (S3901: Yes), the time information input to the operation input unit 23 is stored in the set time storage area 223i (S3902), This processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a notification process (S1362) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of this notification process (S1362).

  In the notification process (S1362), first, the time measurement data obtained by the time measurement device 262 is obtained from the time measurement register 352a, and the current time is read (S4001). It is determined whether time information is stored in the time information storage area 223i (S4002). If it is determined that the time information is not stored in the time information storage area 223i (S4002: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223i, that is, the time setting is executed by the player (S4002: Yes), the time read in S4001 and the set time are It is determined whether there is a match (S4003). If it is determined that it is the set time (S4003), a notification command is set (S4004), and then this process ends.

  When this notification command is output to the display control device 114, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 performs the setting in which the character "the set time has come!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the time set by the player can be set to the pachinko machine 10, and when the set time comes, a notification mode indicating that the set time has come to the player is notified. As a result, the player can remember a schedule such as calling at a set time or sending an e-mail, or the like, or can easily determine the elapsed time since the start of the game.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the processes of S2251 and S2252 are added to the command determination process (S2102 of FIG. 36) of the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a command determination process (S2102) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2102).

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 in the command determination process (S2102 in FIG. 72) that the normal rendering command is not received (S2206: No), it is determined whether the notification command is received (S2251). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2251: Yes), notification command processing is executed (S2252).

  Here, the notification command processing (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the notification command process (S2252).

  In the notification command process (S2252 in FIG. 73), first, the variable display data table corresponding to the character display of "the set time has come!" Is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S4101).

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

  Next, based on the display time corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101, the time data representing the display time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is 0 Is initialized to (S4104). Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, in the configuration according to the present embodiment, by displaying the notification mode on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time set by the player, the player is easily notified that the set time has come. be able to.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, a special variation pattern is selected, or a specific background (for example, a red background) is selected by the time set by the player. Thus, it is possible to naturally recognize that the set time is reached in the game presentation. Therefore, it can be recognized that the player has concentrated on the game and the set time has come.

  In addition, since the fluctuation pattern can be switched at any time, the effect of the game can be changed by the passage of the game time, and the setting according to the player becomes possible, and the player may get bored with the game early. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the information display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time set by the player, but the time information (clocking information) clocked by the clocking device 262 is always displayed. In addition to the time information, the notification mode may be displayed when the time set by the player is reached. As a result, since the player can grasp the current time even before the set time, it is possible for the player to recognize that the set time has come more reliably.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the first to fourth embodiments, the audio lamp control device 113 and the timing device 262 are electrically connected, and based on the information acquired from the timing device 262, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 performs a rendering period. Instead of this, the main control unit 110 and the clocking unit 262 are electrically connected, and based on the information acquired from the clocking unit 262, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 performs a rendering period. It may be configured to determine the type of. In this case, the main control device 110 may include information on the type of effect period in the command output to the audio lamp control device 113. The processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced by causing the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to determine the type of the effect period instead of the MPU of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the first embodiment and the third embodiment, a storage area is provided in the register 352 of the clocking device 262, and the information stored in the RAM 223 is stored when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state. Therefore, although the information is held even in the power-off state, instead, storage means capable of holding the stored information even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, It may be provided separately from the clocking device 262. A flash memory etc. correspond as a specific example of a memory | storage means. As a result, the storage area of the register 352 of the clocking device 262 can be reduced, so that the cost of the clocking device 262 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, when power is turned on, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223 f is provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 based on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off. It has been judged whether the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b is stored or the time information counted by the clock 262 is stored (S1501 of the time acquisition process (S1211), but this is replaced by Alternatively, the time information to be stored in the time information storage area 223 f may be determined based on the signals output from the hall computers connected to the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  Specifically, the hall computer is configured to be able to determine whether the power of each connected pachinko machine 10 is on or not, and the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 with all the pachinko machines 10 powered off. If it is determined that the power has been turned on (that is, if it is determined that the power has been turned on simultaneously for each of the pachinko machines 10), a signal indicating that the power is turned on simultaneously is outputted to each of the pachinko machines 10 for which the power is turned on. Configure to On the other hand, among the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer, only one pachinko machine 10 is powered off and the other pachinko machines 10 are determined to be powered on. If it is determined that the power is turned on to one pachinko machine 10 that is turned off, a signal indicating that the power is turned on independently is output to the one pachinko machine 10 that is turned on. Configure to Then, when the power is turned on, the time information to be stored in the time information storage area 223f may be determined according to the type of the signal output from the hall computer.

  Similarly, in the second embodiment, whether or not to initialize the elapsed time counter 352c is determined according to whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off (elapsed time counter initialization process ( Instead of this, it may be determined whether or not the elapsed time counter 352c should be initialized according to the type of the signal output from the hall computer. In the third embodiment, the counter value to be set in the clock counter 223g is determined according to whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off (S1521 of the counter initial value setting process (S1231) Alternatively, the counter value to be set in the clock counter 223g may be determined according to the type of signal output by the hall computer.

  As a result, the power can be turned on while holding the information stored in the RAM 203 before being turned off. Therefore, even if it was turned off in the state where the holding balls are left or was turned off during the high probability state of the special symbol, it was left based on the reactivation of the power supply. It is possible to suppress the disappearance of the holding ball and the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the disadvantage to the player.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined each one part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Below, in addition to the pachinko machine of this invention, the concept of the various inventions contained in embodiment mentioned above is shown.

<Feature group A> (The power-on time is stored when the power is turned on, and the storage of the power-on time is avoided if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on)
A game comprising: display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode, and clocking means capable of clocking even in a power-off state where power supply to the gaming machine is cut off In the machine, acquisition means capable of acquiring time information which is measured by the time counting means, time information storage means in which the time information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the time information storage means are powered on. Elapsed after the power is turned on based on time information storage control means controllable to obtain time information from the time means and stored by the acquisition means, and time information stored by the time information storage control means The effect mode to be displayed by the display control means is specified based on an elapsed time determination means for determining an elapsed time and the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determination means. The predetermined condition is determined by the effect switching determination means for determining whether to switch to the delivery mode, the condition determination means capable of determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on power on, and the condition determination means When it is determined that the timing information storage control means stores the time measurement information newly acquired by the acquisition means from the time measurement means, the time information storage control means prevents the time information storage control means from storing the time information. And a game machine A1 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A1, the clocking information clocked by the clocking unit is acquired by the acquiring unit, and the clocking information acquired by the acquiring unit is stored in the clocking information storage unit. The time information storage control means is controlled by the time information storage control means so that the time information is acquired from the timekeeping means by the acquisition means based on power-on and stored in the time information storage means, and the time information stored in the time information storage means Based on the elapsed time determination means, the elapsed time elapsed after the power is turned on is determined. Further, based on the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determining means, it is determined by the effect switching determining means whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to the specific mode, and based on power on It is judged by the condition judging means whether the condition of is satisfied. Here, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, the time measurement information newly acquired by the acquisition means by the time measurement means is stored in the time information storage means It is avoided by the avoiding means that the information is stored. Thus, if power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade without establishing predetermined conditions, the predetermined conditions are established even if one gaming machine is turned off. If the power supply is turned on again, overwriting of the time information on the time information storage means is avoided by the avoidance means, so that the timing at which the specific presentation mode is switched is shifted due to being switched off, etc. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine A1, the clocking unit is capable of storing predetermined memory information, and is provided with a power-off storage unit capable of holding the memory information even in the power-off state, and the timing information storage control unit is in the power-off state In this case, the game machine A2 is controlled to store the clocking information stored in the clocking information storage means in the interruption storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the clocking means, predetermined storage information is stored by the interruption storage means capable of holding the storage information even in the interruption state. Here, the timekeeping information storage means is controlled so as to store the timekeeping information stored in the timekeeping information storage means in the interruption memory means when it is in the power-off state. Thus, even if one game machine is turned off, the clocking information stored in the clocking information storage means is held by being stored in the power-off storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, the timing to switch to the specific effect mode is matched with the other gaming machines that were not put into the power-off state only by referring to the clocking information that is kept even during the power-off state. Can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted, so that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  The gaming machine A2 includes storage determination means capable of determining whether or not clocking information is stored in the power-off storage means, and the timing information storage control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The timekeeping information stored in the interruption storage means is stored in the timekeeping information storage means when it is determined by the means and when the storage judgment means determines that the timekeeping information is stored in the interruption memory means A game machine A3 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is judged by the memory judgment means whether or not the time measurement information is stored in the power interruption memory means. Then, when it is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when it is determined by the storage determining means that the timekeeping information is stored in the power interruption storage means, the timekeeping stored in the power interruption storage means Information is stored in the clock information storage means by the clock information storage control means. As a result, when power is turned on in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied despite the fact that time measurement information is not stored in the power failure storage means, time measurement information from the power failure storage means to the time information storage means Since it is possible to suppress that is stored, improper timekeeping information is stored in the timekeeping information storage means, and it is determined by the switching judgment means whether to switch to the specific mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted, so that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine A3, the timekeeping information storage control means is determined by the condition determining means that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on power-on, and the storage determination is made that no timekeeping information is stored in the power interruption storage means. A game machine A4 characterized in that, when judged by the means, the acquisition means controls to store the newly acquired timekeeping information in the timekeeping information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the acquiring unit newly acquires when it is judged by the condition judging unit that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and it is judged by the memory judging unit that the clocking information is not stored in the interruption storage unit. The clocking information storage control means controls the clocking information so as to be stored in the clocking information storage means. Thus, for example, when powering on a plurality of gaming machines whose timing information is not stored in the power-off storage means at the same time due to, for example, the initial state of shipment, the power source is Even if it has inserted, the time information newly acquired by the acquisition means can be stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the switching determination unit from determining whether or not inappropriate clocking information is stored in the clocking information storage unit, and whether to switch to a specific effect mode based on the inappropriate clocking information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress such a problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted for each gaming machine, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, whether the effect switching determination means switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode It is determined whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is performed in the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determining means. The display control means is provided with presentation mode notification means for notifying the information according to the presentation mode after switching to the display control means when it is determined to switch to the state in which the presentation is performed in a different presentation mode from the mode, and the display control means A game machine A5 characterized in that an effect is executed based on the notification by the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the normal effect mode and the specific effect mode are repeated, the novelty can be felt each time the effect mode is switched, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine A5, the display control means is in a state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode, or the specific effect, based on the information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notifying means. A game machine A6 comprising state information storage means for storing information indicating whether an effect is being executed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the effect mode may be specified based on the information stored in the information storage means, the display control means does not need to acquire time information to be measured by the time measuring means to determine the current effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

The gaming machine A6 includes control means for controlling the game, and the display control means
A display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed in response to a command received from the control means among a plurality of display modes, and provided for each of the plurality of display types, for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type A definition information storage unit for storing definition information that defines drawing information indicating necessary information for each screen, and the definition information corresponding to the display type specified by the display specification unit is selected from the definition information storage unit A game machine A7 comprising: selection means for selecting the prescribed information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means from the prescribed information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display control means does not determine all the image information necessary for drawing an image for performing rendering, and the display control means stores the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. Since it is sufficient to expand and transfer the image information in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means, and it is possible to reliably display an image without frame failure on the display means.

<Feature B group> (stored in free bit of Address other than RAM)
In a gaming machine having display means capable of displaying an effect aspect and display control means for causing the display aspect to display the effect aspect, clocking is possible even in a power-off state where power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted Means and time information updated by a part of bits of the first storage area made up of a plurality of bits of the predetermined storage area are stored every time the time information means updates the time measurement information; However, the first storage unit capable of storing the stored information, the second storage unit capable of storing the information stored in the first storage unit, and the first storage based on power-on to the second storage unit Storage control means for controlling to acquire and store timekeeping information stored in the area, and elapsed time elapsed after power on based on the timekeeping information stored in the second storage means by the storage control means Elapsed time format to determine Means for judging whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on the means and the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determining means; And a condition determination unit capable of determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the storage control unit is configured to use the timekeeping information stored in the second storage unit when the power is cut off. It controls so that the time-dependent information at the time of interruption is stored at least in the bit in which the timekeeping information of the first storage area is not stored, and it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition judging means. A game machine B1 for controlling to store timekeeping information based on the power interruption information stored in the first storage means in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, every time the clocking means capable of clocking even in the power-off state updates the clocking information, the predetermined memory area is updated with a part of bits of the first memory area constituted by a plurality of bits. Timekeeping information is stored by the first storage means. The information stored in the first storage means is held even in the power-off state. Then, the information stored in the first storage means is stored in the second storage means, and the second memory means acquires and stores the timekeeping information stored in the first storage area based on the power on. It is controlled by the storage control means. Further, based on the clocking information stored in the second storage unit by the storage control unit, it is determined by the presentation switching determination unit whether or not to switch the presentation mode displayed by the display control unit to a specific presentation mode. Based on the input, it is judged by the condition judging means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when the power is cut off, the storage control unit is configured to store the power-off time information according to the clocking information stored in the second storage unit in at least the bit in which the clocking information of the first storage area is not stored. Control is performed by the condition determination unit so that the time measurement information based on the interruption information stored in the first storage unit is stored in the second storage unit when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination unit. It is controlled by the storage control means. As a result, if power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines without establishing a predetermined condition, even if one gaming machine is switched off, it will be switched off. In the first storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power-off state, the power-off time information is stored, and the power-off time information is held even in the power-off state. Therefore, if the power is turned on again while the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store, in the second storage unit, the clocking information based on the power-off time information held even during the power-off state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the timing at which the effect mode is switched to the effect mode is shifted by being switched off. In addition, when the power interruption information is stored in the first storage unit, the first storage unit can be stored not only in the storage area where no information is stored but also in a part of the first storage area. Can be used efficiently, and information can be stored accurately even if the size of the information at the time of power interruption increases. Therefore, more detailed power-off time information can be stored in the first storage unit, so that the error in the timing of switching to the specific rendering mode can be reduced. As described above, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first storage means is comprised of a plurality of bits, and includes a power-off time information storage area capable of storing power-off time information in all the bits, and the storage control means is in the power-off state. And stores the power interruption time information according to the time measurement information stored in the second storage means into the power interruption time information storage area and the bit in which the time measurement information of the first storage area is not stored. Game machine B2 characterized in that it controls.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the first storage means, the power failure information is made up of a plurality of bits, and is stored in the power failure information storage area in which the power failure information can be stored in all the bits. Then, when it is in the power-off state, the power-off time information according to the clocking information stored in the second storage means is stored in the power-off time information storage area and the bit in which the clocking information of the first storage area is not stored. It is controlled by the storage control means to be stored. Thus, since the power-off information can be stored in the power-off information storage area and the bits not used for counting the first storage area, the first storage is compared to the case where the power-off information is stored in only one of them. The means can be used efficiently. Therefore, the data amount of the power interruption information which can be stored in the first storage means can be increased, so that the information can be accurately stored even if the size of the power interruption information becomes large, Detailed power-off time information can be stored in the first storage means. Therefore, the error of the timing of switching to the specific effect mode can be made smaller, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes storage determination means capable of determining whether or not the power interruption time information is stored in the first storage means, and the storage control means is configured to determine the predetermined condition by the condition determination means. The power failure time information stored in the first storage means when it is determined that the power failure time information is stored in the first storage means by the storage determination means. The game machine B3 is controlled to store timekeeping information based on the second memory means into the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is judged by the memory judgment means whether or not the power failure information is stored in the first memory means. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, and when it is determined that the power-off time information is stored in the first storage means by the storage determination means, the first storage means is stored It is controlled by the storage control means so that the timekeeping information based on the power interruption information is stored in the second storage means. Thereby, the second storage is performed based on the inappropriate information when the power is turned on in the state where the predetermined condition is satisfied although the power-off time information is not stored in the first storage means. Since it can be suppressed that timekeeping information is stored in the means, improper timekeeping information is stored in the timekeeping information storage means, and it is determined whether to switch to a specific mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. It can suppress being judged by the means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted, so that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine B3, the timekeeping information storage control means is determined by the condition determination means that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on power-on, and the power-off time information is not stored in the first storage means. A game machine B4 storing timekeeping information updated by a part of bits of the first storage area, when determined by the storage determination means, in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first storage area is determined by the condition determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the storage determining means determines that the power-off time information is not stored in the first storage means. The clocking information updated by a part of the bits is stored in the second memory by the clocking information storage control unit. As a result, for example, when power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines whose power-off time information is not stored in the first storage means because of, for example, a shipping initial state, a state where a predetermined condition is falsely established. Even if the power supply is turned on at this time, it is possible to cause the second storage means to store updated timing information of a part of the first storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the switching determination unit from determining whether or not inappropriate timekeeping information is stored in the second storage unit, and whether to switch to a specific effect mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress such a problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted for each gaming machine, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B4, whether the effect switching determination means switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode It is determined whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is performed in the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determining means. The display control means is provided with presentation mode notification means for notifying the information according to the presentation mode after switching to the display control means when it is determined to switch to the state in which the presentation is performed in a different presentation mode from the mode, and the display control means A game machine B5 characterized by performing an effect based on the notification by the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the normal effect mode and the specific effect mode are repeated, the novelty can be felt each time the effect mode is switched, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine B5, the display control means is in a state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode based on the information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification means, or the specific effect A game machine B6 comprising state information storage means for storing information indicating whether an effect is being executed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the effect mode may be specified based on the information stored in the information storage means, the display control means does not need to acquire time information to be measured by the time measuring means to determine the current effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B6, a control means for controlling a game is provided, and the display control means is a display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means among a plurality of display modes; Provision information storage means for storing, for each of the plurality of display types, definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type; and the display specifying means Selecting means for selecting the predetermined information corresponding to the display type specified by the predetermined information storage means from the predetermined information storage means, the selection means corresponding to the predetermined information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means A game machine B7 selected from the specified information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display control means does not determine all the image information necessary for drawing an image for performing rendering, and the display control means stores the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. Since it is sufficient to expand and transfer the image information in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means, and it is possible to reliably display an image without frame failure on the display means.

<Feature C group> (A counter is provided on the RTC to count the elapsed time since power on)
A game comprising: display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode, and clocking means capable of clocking even in a power-off state where power supply to the gaming machine is cut off In the game machine, whether to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on an acquisition means capable of acquiring timekeeping information clocked by the timekeeping means and the timekeeping information acquired by the acquisition means The predetermined condition is satisfied by the effect switching judging means for judging whether or not, the condition judging means capable of judging whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the condition judging means A game machine C1 comprising: initialization means for initializing clocking information clocked by the clocking means when it is determined that there is.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the clocking information clocked by the clocking unit is acquired by the acquiring unit. Then, based on the timing information acquired by the acquisition means, the effect switching determination means determines whether to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode. Further, based on the power on, it is judged by the condition judging means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the condition determination means, the time measurement information measured by the time measurement means is initialized by the initialization means. Thus, if power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines in a game arcade with predetermined conditions established, time information kept by the clock means is simultaneously initialized by the initialization means. Since the clocking is newly started at the same timing, it is possible to match the clocking information clocked by the clocking means of each gaming machine. And, since it is judged based on the clocking information whether the switching to the specific rendering mode is made or not, if the clocking information of each gaming machine matches, the timing of switching to the specific rendering mode will be shifted. It can be suppressed. Therefore, in the plurality of gaming machines, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the player by mutually shifting the timing of switching to the specific effect mode.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the condition judging means judges that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, an initialization avoiding means for avoiding that the clocking information clocked by the clocking means is initialized by the initialization means A game machine C2 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is judged by the condition judging means that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the initialization of the clocking information kept by the clocking means is avoided by the initialization avoiding means. As a result, the power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade in a state where the predetermined conditions are satisfied, and after the timekeeping information of the timekeeping means of each gaming machine is timed, one game is completed. Even if the machine is turned off, if the power is turned on again when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the initialization of the clocking information by the initialization avoiding means is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the clocking information clocked by the clocking means deviates from the clocking information clocked by the clocking means of the gaming machine which has not been turned off, so that clocking information can be obtained in a plurality of gaming machines. By shifting the timings of switching to the specific effect mode based on the above, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the clock means includes a clock means for clocking time and an elapsed time clock means for clocking an elapsed time, and the initialization means is an elapsed time for clocking the elapsed time clock means. A game machine C3 characterized in that it is to be initialized.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, while grasping the current time, it is possible to grasp the elapsed time since the power is turned on.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C3, whether the effect switching determination means switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode It is determined whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is performed in the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determining means. The display control means is provided with presentation mode notification means for notifying the information according to the presentation mode after switching to the display control means when it is determined to switch to the state in which the presentation is performed in a different presentation mode from the mode, and the display control means The game machine C4 executes an effect based on a notification from the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the normal effect mode and the specific effect mode are repeated, the novelty can be felt each time the effect mode is switched, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine C4, the display control means is in a state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode based on the information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification means, or the specific effect A game machine C5 comprising state information storage means for storing information indicating whether an effect is being executed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the effect mode may be specified based on the information stored in the information storage means, the display control means does not need to acquire time information to be measured by the time measuring means to determine the current effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C5, a control means for controlling the game is provided, and the display control means is a display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means among a plurality of display modes; Provision information storage means for storing, for each of the plurality of display types, definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type; and the display specifying means Selecting means for selecting the predetermined information corresponding to the display type specified by the predetermined information storage means from the predetermined information storage means, the selection means corresponding to the predetermined information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means A game machine C6 selected from the specified information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display control means does not determine all the image information necessary for drawing an image for performing rendering, and the display control means stores the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. Since it is sufficient to expand and transfer the image information in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means, and it is possible to reliably display an image without frame failure on the display means.

<Feature D group> (determine the initial value of the counting means based on the period during which the power is turned off)
A game comprising: display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode, and clocking means capable of clocking even in a power-off state where power supply to the gaming machine is cut off In the game machine, whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on the count means for updating the count value every predetermined cycle based on power on and the count value of the count means The time information storage means capable of storing the time information acquired by the acquisition means, and the time information storage means capable of storing the time information acquired by the acquisition means; Timekeeping information storage control means that can be controlled so that time information is acquired from the timekeeping means by the acquisition means and stored in the storage means when the power is cut off; If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition judging means capable of judging whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not, the clocking information storage control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game comprising: initial value determination means for determining an initial value of the counting means based on timekeeping information stored in the timekeeping information storage means and timekeeping information newly acquired by the acquisition means Machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the count value is updated by the counting means every predetermined cycle based on the power-on, and based on the count value of the counting means, the effect mode displayed by the display control means is a specific effect mode. Whether or not to switch is determined by the effect switching determining means. Then, the clocking information clocked by the clocking unit is acquired by the acquiring unit, and the clocking information acquired by the acquiring unit is stored in the clocking information storage unit. The clock information storage control unit is controlled by the clock information storage control unit so that the clock information is acquired from the clock unit by the acquiring unit and stored in the clock information storage unit when the power is cut off. Here, based on power-on, it is judged by the condition judging means whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when it is judged that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the clock information storage The initial value of the counting means is determined by the initial value determination means according to the time measurement information stored in the time measurement information storage means by the control means and the time measurement information newly obtained by the acquisition means. As a result, if power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines in a game arcade without establishing predetermined conditions, clocking information is obtained even when one gaming machine is turned off. The period in the power-off state can be specified from the time-counting information stored in the storage means and the time-counting information newly acquired by the acquiring means, so that the counting means can be based on the period in the power-off state. The initial value of can be determined by the initial value determination means. Therefore, by determining a value corresponding to the count value updated by the count means of another gaming machine while in the power-off state as the initial value, it is possible to suppress a failure that the timing of switching to the specific rendering mode deviates. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine D1, when it is possible to store count information based on the count value of the count means and hold information stored in the power-off state, and in the case of the power-off state, And count information storage control means for storing count information based on the count value of the count means in the count information storage means, wherein the initial value determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means. When it is determined, the count information stored in the count information storage means by the count information storage control means, the time measurement information stored in the time information storage means by the time information storage control means, and the acquisition means The present invention is characterized in that the initial value of the counting means is determined based on newly acquired timekeeping information. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, count information based on the count value of the count means is stored by the count information storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power-off state. When the power is cut off, count information based on the count value of the count means is stored in the count information storage means by the count information storage control means. Here, when it is determined by the condition determination unit that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the count information stored in the count information storage unit by the count information storage control unit, and the clock information storage control The initial value determination means determines the initial value of the counting means based on the time information stored in the time information storage means by the means and the time information newly acquired by the acquisition means. Thus, the initial value of the counting means can be determined in consideration of the count value of the counting means immediately before the disconnection state, so the count value before the disconnection state and the period during the disconnection state can be determined. Thus, the value corresponding to the count value of the counting means of the gaming machine which has not been turned off can be accurately determined as the initial value of the counting means by the initial value determining means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted between the gaming machine in the power-off state and the gaming machine in the non-power-off state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine D2, the count value of the counting means can take a value between a specific minimum value and a specific maximum value, and the value is subtracted at each update, and the value is reduced When the value is updated after reaching the specific minimum value, the value is updated to the specific maximum value, and the initial value determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determining means. The gaming machine D3 characterized in that, when it is determined that the predetermined maximum value is not determined, it is determined as the initial value of the counting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the count value of the counting means can take a value between a specific minimum value and a specific maximum value. Then, the value is decremented by the counting means each time updating, and if the value is updated after the value reaches a specific minimum value, the value is updated by the counting means to a specific maximum value. Here, when it is judged by the condition judging means that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the specific maximum value is decided by the initial value deciding means as the initial value of the counting means. As a result, the count value of the counting means is updated at a predetermined cycle in a predetermined range from a specific maximum value to a specific minimum value, so that the count value becomes a specific minimum value after becoming a specific maximum value. The time taken by can be made constant. Therefore, when the power is turned on again in the state where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the initial value determining means can easily determine the initial value of the count value based on the period of the power-off state. Further, since the time required for the count value of the counting means to make a round is constant, the time for switching to a specific effect mode can also be constant. Therefore, since the player can easily guess the time zone to be the specific effect mode, the player can play the game aiming at the time of the specific effect mode, or on the contrary, in the normal effect mode other than the specific effect. It is possible to play games by aiming for time. As described above, there is an effect that the player having various preferences can easily recognize the time zone in which the effect mode matches the preferences.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D3, in the state where the effect is determined to be executed in the specific effect mode, is the effect switching determination means switched to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode? It is determined whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is performed in the specific effect mode in a state in which the effect is performed in the normal effect mode, and the current effect is determined by the effect switching determining means. The display control means is provided with presentation mode notification means for notifying the information according to the presentation mode after switching to the display control means, when it is determined to switch to the state in which the presentation is performed in a different presentation mode from the mode The game machine D4 executes an effect based on the notification by the effect mode notification means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the normal effect mode and the specific effect mode are repeated, the novelty can be felt each time the effect mode is switched, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine D4, the display control means is in a state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode based on the information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification means, or the specific effect A game machine D5 comprising state information storage means for storing information indicating whether an effect is being executed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the effect mode may be specified based on the information stored in the information storage means, the display control means does not need to acquire time information to be measured by the time measuring means to determine the current effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine D5 includes control means for performing control related to a game, and the display control means specifies a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means among a plurality of display modes; Provision information storage means for storing, for each of the plurality of display types, definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type; and the display specifying means Selecting means for selecting the predetermined information corresponding to the display type specified by the predetermined information storage means from the predetermined information storage means, the selection means corresponding to the predetermined information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means A game machine D6 selected from the specified information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display control means does not determine all the image information necessary for drawing an image for performing rendering, and the display control means stores the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. Since it is sufficient to expand and transfer the image information in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means, and it is possible to reliably display an image without frame failure on the display means.

<Feature E group> (store time to switch to specific effects in storage means)
In the gaming machine having display means capable of displaying the effect mode and display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode, clocking is possible even in a power-off state where the power supply to the game machine is cut off The display control means displays the clock based on the clocking means having a storage area capable of storing predetermined setting information, the clocking information clocked by the clocking means, and the predetermined setting information stored in the memory area Effect switching determining means for determining whether or not to switch the effect mode to a specific effect mode, condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the condition determining means The time setting information for measuring the predetermined setting information and the time measuring means whether or not the effect mode is to be switched to the specific effect mode based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Game machine characterized by comprising a-on determining means for determining from E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the predetermined setting information is stored by the storage area of the clock means capable of clocking even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Then, based on the clocking information clocked by the clocking means and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area, it is determined whether the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to a specific effect mode or not It is judged by means. Further, based on the power on, it is judged by the condition judging means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, based on the fact that the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined setting information and the time information to be measured by the time measurement means determine whether or not to switch the effect mode to a specific effect mode. Is determined by the insertion time determination means. As a result, even if the power of one of the plurality of gaming machines is turned off, the clocking means having the storage area operates even after the power supply is cut off, so the predetermined time stored in the storage area is maintained. The setting information can be held even after the power supply is cut off. Therefore, based on the predetermined setting information, it is determined by the effect switching determination means whether or not to switch to a specific effect mode, so that the timing at which the specific effect mode is switched is other than that the power supply is not cut off It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the game machine is shifted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine E1, the time counting means includes a specific mode notifying means for notifying the display control means when it is determined by the effect switching determining means to switch the effect mode to a specific effect mode, and the specific mode A game machine E2, characterized in that the display control means switches the effect mode to be displayed on the display means to a specific effect mode based on the notification by the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined by the effect switching determination means that the effect mode is switched to the specific effect mode in the clock means, the specific mode notification means is notified to the display control means. Then, based on the notification by the specific mode notification means, the effect mode to be displayed on the display means is switched to the specific effect mode by the display control means. Thereby, since the display control means may switch the effect mode to the specific effect mode based on the notification from the specific mode notification means, in order to determine whether or not to switch to the specific effect mode, clocking of the clock means There is no need to obtain information frequently and check the elapsed time. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E2, the effect switching determination means displays the effect mode displayed by the display control means on the basis of clocking information clocked by the clocking means and predetermined setting information stored in the storage area. It is determined whether or not to switch to the normal effect mode, and the time counting means notifies the display control means when it is determined by the effect switching determining means to switch the effect mode to the normal effect mode. And a display control means for switching the effect mode to be displayed on the display means to the normal effect mode based on the notification by the normal mode notification means. .

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect switching determination means determines whether or not the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to the normal effect mode based on the time information counted by the time measuring means and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area It is judged by The time counting means is notified to the display control means by the normal mode notifying means when it is determined by the effect switching determining means that the effect mode is to be switched to the normal effect mode. Here, based on the notification by the normal mode notification means, the effect mode to be displayed on the display means is switched to the normal effect mode by the display control means. Thereby, since the display control means may switch the effect mode to the normal effect mode based on the notification from the normal mode notification means, in order to determine whether to switch to the normal effect mode, the clocking means measures time There is no need to obtain information frequently and check the elapsed time. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced.

<Feature F group> (Informs at the set time of the player)
A gaming machine comprising: display means capable of displaying an effect mode; display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode; and clocking means capable of clocking even when power supply to the game machine is cut off, Whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on setting means by which the player can set setting information, time information which the time measuring means counts, and setting information set in the setting means A condition judging unit for judging, and a notification mode selecting unit for selecting a notification mode to be notified by the notification unit based on the setting information when it is judged by the condition judging unit that the predetermined condition is satisfied; A game machine F1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F1, setting information is set by the setting means. Then, based on the clocking information clocked by the clocking unit and the setting information set in the setting unit, the condition judging unit judges whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, the notification mode selected by the notification means is selected by the notification mode selection means based on the setting information. As a result, the player who sets the setting information in the setting means can recognize that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the notification by the notification means, so that the predetermined condition is satisfied so as to concentrate on the game. It is possible to suppress continuing the game without noticing. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the game machine F1, the display control means causes the display means to display an effect mode based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the effect mode selected by the notification mode selection means is displayed on the display means by the display control means. As a result, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the presentation mode based on the notification mode is displayed on the display means which is a portion where the player pays attention in the game when the predetermined condition is established, so the player does not notice the notification. There is an effect that it can control continuing a game. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the gaming machine F1 or F2 comprises erasing means capable of erasing the setting information set by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the setting information set by the setting means is erased by the erasing means. Thereby, the setting information can be erased according to the erasing means when another player sets by the setting means but quits the game before the predetermined condition based on the setting information is satisfied. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress that a player who plays a game with the gaming machine next is notified by the notification means when a predetermined condition based on setting information set by the previous player is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the fact that the notification by the notification means interferes with the game.

  The gaming machines F1 to F3 are provided with control means for controlling the game, and the display control means is provided for each of the plurality of notification modes, and is a drawing showing information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the notification modes. It corresponds to a notification mode selected by the notification mode selection unit from among the predetermined information storage unit that stores the predetermined information that defines the information for each screen, and the plurality of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage unit. A game machine F4 comprising selection means for selecting regulation information, wherein the display control means executes a notification mode based on the regulation information selected by the selection means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display control means does not determine all the image information necessary for drawing an image for performing rendering, and the display control means stores the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. Since it is sufficient to expand and transfer the image information in accordance with the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means, and it is possible to reliably display an image without frame failure on the display means.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, and F1 to F4, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, and F1 to F4. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The game machine Z3 to be characterized. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with clock means such as an RTC, and effects are made different based on time information acquired from the clock means, thereby realizing different game characteristics depending on the time slot for playing a game, There are some which are aiming at improvement of interest to a player's game (for example, patent document 1: JP-A-2006-19803).
However, in such a gaming machine, for example, power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines, and clocking information is acquired from clocking means and stored based on the timing of the powering-on. By configuring to execute a specific effect based on the fact that a predetermined time has elapsed from the time information, it is possible to execute an effect with a plurality of gaming machines synchronized in timing.
Here, if such a configuration is adopted, stored clocking information is erased and the like is erased if a situation occurs in which only the power of some gaming machines is turned off during business. Even when the power is turned on again, the time information stored in the other gaming machines is shifted. Therefore, there is a problem that the player may be confused because the timing at which a specific effect is performed is also shifted.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player feels a sense of discomfort when playing a game. There is.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has display means capable of displaying the effect mode, and display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode. Clocking means capable of clocking even in a power-off state in which the power supply has been interrupted, and each time the clocking means updates clocking information, part of a first storage area constituted by a plurality of bits in a predetermined storage area A first storage unit capable of storing clock information updated by a bit and capable of storing the stored information even in the power-off state; and a second storage unit capable of storing the information stored in the first storage unit; Storage control means for controlling to obtain and store timekeeping information stored in the first storage area based on power-on in the second storage means, and the storage control means stores the information in the second storage means After power on based on the timing information Whether to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on the elapsed time determination means for determining the elapsed time elapsed and the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determination means The apparatus further comprises: an effect switching determining unit to determine, and a condition determining unit capable of determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on power on, and the storage control unit is configured to be in the power-off state. (2) Control is made to store the power interruption time information according to the timekeeping information stored in the storage means at least in the bit in the first storage area where the timekeeping information is not stored, and the condition judging means satisfies the predetermined condition If it is determined that the time information is determined, control is performed to store, in the second storage means, timing information based on the power interruption information stored in the first storage means.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the first storage means is composed of a plurality of bits, and a power-off information storage area capable of storing information on power-off in all bits. And the storage control means, when in the power-off state, includes the power-off time information according to the timing information stored in the second storage means, the power-off time information storage area, and the first It is controlled to store the timekeeping information of the storage area to a bit not stored.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, further comprising a memory judgment unit capable of judging whether the power-off time information is stored in the first memory unit, The storage control means is determined by the condition determination means that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the storage determination means determines that the power-off time information is stored in the first storage means. It is controlled to store timekeeping information based on the power-off time information stored in the first storage means in the second storage means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, every time the clocking means capable of clocking even in the power-off state updates the clocking information, a part of the first memory area constituted by a plurality of bits in the predetermined memory area Timekeeping information updated with bits is stored by the first storage means. The information stored in the first storage means is held even in the power-off state. Then, the information stored in the first storage means is stored in the second storage means, and the second memory means acquires and stores the timekeeping information stored in the first storage area based on the power on. It is controlled by the storage control means. Further, based on the clocking information stored in the second storage unit by the storage control unit, it is determined by the presentation switching determination unit whether or not to switch the presentation mode displayed by the display control unit to a specific presentation mode. Based on the input, it is judged by the condition judging means whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when the power is cut off, the storage control unit is configured to store the power-off time information according to the clocking information stored in the second storage unit in at least the bit in which the clocking information of the first storage area is not stored. Control is performed by the condition determination unit so that the time measurement information based on the interruption information stored in the first storage unit is stored in the second storage unit when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination unit. It is controlled by the storage control means. As a result, if power is simultaneously applied to a plurality of gaming machines without establishing a predetermined condition, even if one gaming machine is switched off, it will be switched off. In the first storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power-off state, the power-off time information is stored, and the power-off time information is held even in the power-off state. Therefore, if the power is turned on again while the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store, in the second storage unit, the clocking information based on the power-off time information held even during the power-off state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the timing at which the effect mode is switched to the effect mode is shifted by being switched off. In addition, when the power interruption information is stored in the first storage unit, the first storage unit can be stored not only in the storage area where no information is stored but also in a part of the first storage area. Can be used efficiently, and information can be stored accurately even if the size of the information at the time of power interruption increases. Therefore, more detailed power-off time information can be stored in the first storage unit, so that the error in the timing of switching to the specific rendering mode can be reduced. As described above, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, in the first storage means, the power failure information is made up of a plurality of bits, and is stored in the power failure information storage area capable of storing the power failure information in all the bits. Then, when it is in the power-off state, the power-off time information according to the time measurement information stored in the second storage means is stored in the power-off time information storage area and the bit in which the time measurement information of the first storage area is not stored It is controlled by the storage control means to be stored. Thus, since the power-off information can be stored in the power-off information storage area and the bits not used for counting the first storage area, the first storage is compared to the case where the power-off information is stored in only one of them. The means can be used efficiently. Therefore, the data amount of the power interruption information which can be stored in the first storage means can be increased, so that the information can be accurately stored even if the size of the power interruption information becomes large, Detailed power-off time information can be stored in the first storage means. Therefore, the error of the timing of switching to the specific effect mode can be made smaller, so that it is possible to suppress giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, it is judged by the memory judgment means whether or not the power failure information is stored in the first memory means. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, and when it is determined that the power-off time information is stored in the first storage means by the storage determination means, the first storage means is stored It is controlled by the storage control means so that the timekeeping information based on the power interruption information is stored in the second storage means. Thereby, the second storage is performed based on the inappropriate information when the power is turned on in the state where the predetermined condition is satisfied although the power-off time information is not stored in the first storage means. Since it can be suppressed that timekeeping information is stored in the means, improper timekeeping information is stored in the timekeeping information storage means, and it is determined whether to switch to a specific mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. It can suppress being judged by the means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted, so that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 Display control device (display control means)
115 power supply unit (second power supply means)
223f Time information storage area (second storage means)
262 Timekeeping device ( update means)
Power supply for 263 clock device (1st power supply means)
352 register (first storage means)
352a Timekeeping register ( update means)
S 1505 storage control means S 1602 elapsed time determination means
Part of S1611 display switching means
Part of S2205 display switching means

Claims (1)

Display means capable of displaying the effect mode;
In a gaming machine having display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode,
Clocking means capable of clocking even in the power-off state where the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off,
Every time the clock means updates the clock information, the clock information updated by a part of bits of the first memory area made up of a plurality of bits of the predetermined memory area is stored, and is stored even in the power-off state. First storage means capable of storing the stored information;
Second storage means capable of storing information stored in the first storage means;
Storage control means for controlling the second storage means to acquire and store timekeeping information stored in the first storage area based on power-on;
An elapsed time determination unit that determines an elapsed time elapsed after the power is turned on based on the time measurement information stored in the second storage unit by the storage control unit;
An effect switching determining means for determining whether or not to switch the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determining means;
And condition determining means capable of determining whether a predetermined condition is established based on power-on,
The storage control means
The power-off time information according to the time-counting information stored in the second storage means is controlled to be stored at least in the bit in which the time-counting information of the first storage area is not stored when the power-off state is reached. And, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is established by the condition determination unit, control is performed to store, in the second storage unit, timing information based on the power interruption information stored in the first storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by being

Images